Перевод: с греческого на все языки

со всех языков на греческий

Со всех языков на:
Греческий
С греческого на:
Английский

use of a common word

Толкование Перевод

1 κοινότης

κοινότης, ητος, ἡ,

A sharing in common, community, τῶν γυναικῶν καὶ παίδων καὶ τῆς οὐσίας Arist.Pol. 1274b10
; ἡ περὶ τὰ τέκνα κ. καὶ τὰς γυναῖκας ib. 1266a34; κ. φωνῆς common language, i.e. not peculiar or dialectal, Isoc.15.296, cf. D.H.Th.54, Pomp.2.

2 common or universal quality, Pl.Tht. 208d, Plot.1.3.4; opp. ἰδιότης, Epicur.Ep. 1p.17U.; κ. τοῦ ἵππου A.D.Pron.26.20
: pl., common features, Phld. Ir.p.71 W., Mort.34, Plu.Comp.Lyc.Num.1; esp.in Medicine, term of the 'Methodic' school, Gal.1.80, al., cf. Plu.2.129d (pl.).

3 generality, vagueness, τῶν ὁμολογιῶν D.H.2.39
, etc.; ambiguity, ὀνόματος Epicur.Nat.14.10
, cf.Demetr.Lac.Herc.1014.48, Diog.Oen.27.

II in Politics, absence of privileges or distinctions, πολιτείας (sc. δημοκρατίας) ἣ μάλιστα κοινότητα δοκεῖ προῃρῆσθαι And.4.13
.

2 affability, X.HG1.1.30; accessibility, λιμένων Aristid.Or.23(42).24
, al.

III Gramm., use of a common word in two clauses, esp. in phrase ἐν κοινότητι παραλαμβάνεσθαι, A.D.Synt.122.27, al.

2 common gender, ib.55.2, al.

IV concrete, the general body of a βουλή, POxy.2110.29 (iv A.D.).

2 κ. τῶν ἀγρευτῶν, = κοινόν (cf. κοινός 11.2b
), Sammelb.6704.4, al. (vi A.D.).

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > κοινότης
2 ἄν

ἄν (A), [pron. full] [ᾰ], [dialect] Ep., Lyr., [dialect] Ion., Arc., [dialect] Att.; also κεν) [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Aeol., Thess., κᾱ [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., El.; the two combined in [dialect] Ep. (infr. D. 11.2) and Arc.,

A εἰκ ἄν IG5(2).6.2
, 15 (iv B. C.):—modal Particle used with Verbs to indicate that the action is limited by circumstances or defined by conditions. In Hom. κε is four times as common as ἄν, in Lyr. about equally common. No clear distinction can be traced, but κε as an enclitic is somewhat less emphatic; ἄν is preferred by Hom. in negative clauses, κε ([etym.] ν) with the relative.

A In Simple Sentences, and in the Apodosis of Compound Sentences; here ἄν belongs to the Verb, and denotes that the assertion made by the Verb is dependent on a condition, expressed or implied: thus ἦλθεν he came, ἦλθεν ἄν he would have come (under conditions, which may or may not be defined), and so he might have come; ἔλθοι may he come, ἔλθοι ἄν he would come (under certain conditions), and so he might come.

I WITH INDICATIVE:

1 with historical tenses, generally [tense] impf. and [tense] aor., less freq. [tense] plpf., never [tense] pf., v. infr.,

a most freq. in apodosis of conditional sentences, with protasis implying nonfulfilment of a past or present condition, and apod. expressing what would be or would have been the case if the condition were or had been fulfilled. The [tense] impf. with ἄν refers to continued action, in Hom. always in past time, exc. perh. καί κε θάμ' ἐνθάδ' ἐόντες ἐμισγόμεθ' Od.4
. 178; later also in [tense] pres. time, first in Thgn.905; πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο it would be far more strange if they were honoured, Pl.R. 489a; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he would not have been master of islands if he had not had also some naval power, Th.1.9. The [tense] aor. strictly refers only to past time, Pi.N.11.24, etc.; εἰ τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν if he had then come to this opinion, he would have accomplished nothing of what he has now done, D.4.5, al., but is used idiomatically with Verbs of saying, answering, etc., as we say I should have said, εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ', εἶπον ἄν σ' οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν S.Ant. 755
, cf. Pl.Smp. 199d, Euthphr. 12d, etc.: the [tense] plpf. refers to completed actions, as ὃ εἰ ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη I should have already learnt.., ib. 14c; εἰ ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπέθανεν, δικαίως ἂν ἐτεθνήκει Antipho 4.2.3
.

b the protasis is freq. understood: ὑπό κεν ταλασίφρονά περ δέος εἷλεν fear would have seized even the stout-hearted (had he heard the sound), Il.4.421; τὸ γὰρ ἔρυμα τῷ στρατοπέδῳ οὐκ ἂν ἐτειχίσαντο they would not have built the wall (if they had not won a battle), Th.1.11; πολλοῦ γὰρ ἂν ἦν ἄξια for (if that were so) they would be worth much, Pl.R. 374d; οὐ γὰρ ἦν ὅ τι ἂν ἐποιεῖτε for there was nothing which you could have done, i. e. would have done (if you had tried), D.18.43.

c with no definite protasis understood, to express what would have been likely to happen, or might have happened in past time: ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν γε κιχήσεαι, ἤ κεν Ὀρέστης κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you, Od.4.546; ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἠράσθη δάϊος εἶναι every man who saw this (the 'Seven against Thebes') would have longed to be a warrior, Ar. Ra. 1022; esp. with τάχα, q. v., ἀλλ' ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ' ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθὲν μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ φρενῶν, i. e. it might perhaps have come, S.OT 523; τάχα ἂν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες (sc. διέβησαν ) and they might also perhaps have crossed by sea (to Sicily) in some other way, Th.6.2, cf. Pl.Phdr. 265b.

d ἄν is freq. omitted in apodosi with Verbs expressing obligation, propriety, or possibility, as ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc., and sts. for rhetorical effect, εἰ μὴ.. ᾖσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν it had caused (for it would have caused) fear, E.Hec. 1113. This use becomes more common in later Gk.

2 with [tense] fut. ind.:

a frequently in [dialect] Ep., usu. with κεν, rarely ἄν, Il.9.167, 22.66, indicating a limitation or condition, ὁ δέ κεν κεχολώσεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι and he will likely be angry to whom- soever I shall come, ib.1.139; καί κέ τις ὧδ' ἐρέει and in that case men will say, 4.176; ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι καταλέξω Od.3.80
; so in Lyr., μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ Pi.N.7.68
, cf. I.6(5).59.

b rarely in codd. of [dialect] Att. Prose writers, σαφὲς ἂν καταστήσετε Th.1.140
; οὐχ ἥκει, οὐδ' ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο Pl.R. 615d
, cf. Ap. 29c, X.An.2.5.13; dub. in Hp.Mul.2.174: in later Prose, Philostr. V A2.21, S E.M.9.225: also in Poetry, E.El. 484, Ar.Av. 1313; οὐκ ἂν προδώσω Herod.6.36
(corr. - δοίην):— for ἄν with [tense] fut. inf. and part. v. infr.

II WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, only in [dialect] Ep., the meaning being the same as with the [tense] fut. ind. (1.2a), freq. with [ per.] 1st pers., as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι in that case I will take her myself, Il.1.324; πείθευ, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι εἰδέω χάριν obey and if so I will be grateful, 14.235 (the subj. is always introduced by δέ in this usage); also with other persons, giving emphasis to the future, οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃ κίθαρις 3.54
, al.

III WITH OPTATIVE (never [tense] fut., rarely [tense] pf. πῶς ἂν λελήθοι [με]; X.Smp.3.6):

a in apodosis of conditional sentences, after protasis in opt. with εἰ or some other conditional or relative word, expressing a [tense] fut. condition: ἀλλ' εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28
; οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον; Pl.Phd. 68b
:—in Hom. [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. opt. with κε or ἄν are sts. used like [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. ind. with ἄν in Attic, with either regular ind. or another opt. in the protasis: καί νύ κεν ἔνθ' ἀπόλοιτο.. εἰ μὴ.. νόησε κτλ., i. e. he would have perished, had she not perceived, etc., Il.5.311, cf. 5.388, 17.70; εἰ νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ.. κλισίηνδε φεροίμην if we were now contending in another's honour, I should now carry.., ib.23.274: so rarely in Trag., οὐδ' ἂν σὺ φαίης, εἴ σε μὴ κνίζοι λέχος (for εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568.

b with protasis in [tense] pres. or [tense] fut., the opt. with ἄν in apodosi takes a simply future sense: φρούριον δ' εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος they might perhaps damage, Th.1.142, cf. 2.60, Pl.Ap. 25b, R. 333e; ἢν οὖν μάθῃς.. οὐκ ἂν ἀποδοίην Ar.Nu. 116
, cf. D.1.26, al.

c with protasis understood: φεύγωμεν· ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ Od.10.269
; οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν· διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν for (if they should do so) they would burst, X. Cyr.8.2.21; τὸν δ' οὔ κε δύ' ἀνέρε.. ἀπ' οὔδεος ὀχλίσσειαν two men could not heave the stone from the ground, i. e. would not, if they should try, Il.12.447; οὐδ' ἂν δικαίως ἐς κακὸν πέσοιμί τι S.Ant. 240
, cf. D.2.8: in Hom. sts. with ref. to past time, Τυδεΐδην οὐκ ἂν γνοίης ποτέροισι μετείη Il.5.85
.

d with no definite protasis implied, in potential sense: ἡδέως δ' ἂν ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην but I would gladly ask Leptines, D.20.129; βουλοίμην ἄν I should like , Lat. velim (but ἐβουλόμην ἄν I should wish, if it were of any avail, vellem); ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ' ἄν; which way then can we turn? Pl.Euthd. 290a; οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I will not give up the throne, Ar.Ra. 830; idiomatically, referring to the past, αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἶεν but these would not (on investigation) prove to be many, Th.1.9; εἴησαν δ' ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες these would be (i. e. would have been) Cretans, Hdt.1.2: used in order to soften assertions by giving them a less positive form, as οὐκ ἂν οὖν πάνυ γέ τι σπουδαῖον εἴη ἡ δικαιοσύνη, i.e. it would not prove to be, etc. (for, it is not, etc.), Pl.R. 333e.

e in questions, expressing a wish: τίς ἂν θεῶν.. δοίη; S.OC 1100
, cf.A.Ag. 1448; πῶς ἂν θάνοιμι; S.Aj. 389
: hence (with no question) as a mild command, exhortation, or entreaty, τλαίης κεν Μενελάῳ ἐπιπροέμεν ταχὺν ἰόν Il.4.94
; σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις you may take yourself off (milder than κόμιζε σεαυτόν), S.Ant. 444; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you may go in, El. 1491; κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε hear me now, Phoebus, ib. 637; φράζοις ἄν, λέγοις ἄν, Pl.Phlb. 23c, 48b.

f in a protasis which is also an apodosis: εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι if I would trust any (other) man (if he gave me his word), I trust you, Id.Prt. 329b; εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ' ἂν τοῦτο if you would not do this (if you could), D.4.18, cf. X.Mem.1.5.3, Plot.6.4.16.

g rarely omitted with opt. in apodosis: ῥεῖα θεός γ' ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι Od.3.231
, cf. 14.123, Il.5.303; also in Trag., θᾶσσον ἢ λέγοι τις E.Hipp. 1186
; τεὰν δύνασιν τίς.. κατάσχοι; S.Ant. 605
.

h ἄν c. [tense] fut. opt. is prob. always corrupt (cf. 1.2b), as τὸν αὐτὸν ἂν ἐπαινέσοι ( ἐπαινέσαι Bekk.) Pl.Lg. 719e; εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδέν' ἂν καταλήψοιτο ( οὐδένα Bekk.) Lys.1.22.

IV WITH INF. and PART. (sts. ADJ. equivalent to part., τῶν δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι Pl.R. 577b
) representing ind. or opt.:

1 [tense] pres. inf. or part.:

a representing [tense] impf. ind., οἴεσθε τὸν πατέρα.. οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν; do you think he would not have kept them safe? ([etym.] οὐκ ἂν ἐφύλαττεν), D.49.35; ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων [ὑμῶν] ἐπιβοηθεῖν when you would have been unable, Th.1.73, cf. 4.40.

b representing [tense] pres. opt., πόλλ' ἂν ἔχων (representing ἔχοιμ' ἄν) ἕτερ' εἰπεῖν παραλείπω D. 18.258
, cf. X.An.2.3.18: with Art., τὸ ἐθέλειν ἂν ἰέναι ἄκλητος ἐπὶ δεῖπνον Pl.Smp. 174b
.

2 [tense] aor. inf. or part.:

a representing [tense] aor. ind., οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ' αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not think he would even have run thither? ([etym.] καὶ ἐπέδραμεν ἄν), D.27.56; ἴσμεν ὑμᾶς ἀναγκασθέντας ἄν we know you would have been compelled, Th.1.76, cf. 3.89; ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς when he might easily have been acquitted, X.Mem.4.4.4.

b representing [tense] aor. opt., οὐδ' ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι I think they would not even be masters of the land ([etym.] οὐδ' ἂν κρατήσειαν), Th.6.37, cf. 2.20; ὁρῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν ([etym.] ληφθείη ἄν) Id.7.42; οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα, i.e. things which are not and never could happen ([etym.] ἃ οὔτε ἂν γένοιτο), Id.6.38.

3 [tense] pf. inf. or part. representing:

a [tense] plpf. ind., πάντα ταῦθ' ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι ([etym.] φήσειεν ἄν ) he would say that all these would have been destroyed by the barbarians ([etym.] ἑαλώκη ἄν), D.19.312.

b [tense] pf. opt., οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ.. καταψηφίσαισθε I do not believe they would (then) have suffered ([etym.] δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν) punishment enough, etc., Lys.27.9.

4 [tense] fut. inf.or part., never in [dialect] Ep., and prob. always corrupt in [dialect] Att., νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν (leg. - ῆσαι) Th.5.82, cf. 6.66, 8.25,71; part. is still more exceptional, ὡς ἐμοῦ οὐκ ἂν ποιήσοντος ἄλλα Pl.Ap. 30c
(codd.), cf. D.19.342 (v. l.); both are found in later Gk., νομίσαντες ἂν οἰκήσειν οὕτως ἄριστα Plb.8.30.8
, cf. Plu.Marc.15, Arr.An.2.2.3; with part., Epicur. Nat.14.1, Luc.Asin.26, Lib.Or.62.21, dub. l. in Arr.An.6.6.5.

B IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES.

I In the protasis of conditional sentences with εἰ, regularly with the subjunctive. In Attic εἰ ἄν is contracted into ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν ([etym.] ᾱ) (q. v.): Hom. has generally εἴ κε (or αἴ κε), sts. ἤν, once εἰ δ' ἄν Il.3.288
, twice εἴπερ ἄν 5.224
, 232. The protasis expresses either future condition (with apod. of [tense] fut. time) or general condition (with apod. of repeated action): εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἔρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' ὅς .. if thus thou shalt do.., ib.2.364; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death (ever) come near.., E.Alc. 671.

2 in relative or temporal clauses with a conditional force; here ἄν coalesces with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, cf. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπάν ([dialect] Ion. ἐπεάν) , ἐπειδάν: Hom. has ὅτε κε (sts. ὅτ' ἄν) , ὁππότε κε (sts. ὁπότ' ἄν or ὁππότ' ἄν) , ἐπεί κε ( ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412
), ἐπήν, εὖτ' ἄν; v. also εἰσόκε ([etym.] εἰς ὅ κε):—τάων ἥν κ' ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ' ἄκοιτιν whomsoever of these I may wish.., Il.9.397; ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I shall have no strength.., S.Ant.91; ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὅς χ' ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ who ever conceals one thing in his mind and speaks another, Il.9.312, cf. D.4.6, Th.1.21. —Hom. uses subj. in both the above constructions (1 and 2 ) without ἄν; also Trag. and Com., S.Aj. 496, Ar.Eq. 805; μέχρι and πρίν occasionally take subj. without ἄν in prose, e.g. Th.1.137,4.16 ([etym.] μέχρι οὗ), Pl.Phd. 62c, Aeschin.3.60.

3 in final clauses introduced by relative Advbs., as ὡς, ὅπως (of Manner), ἵνα (of Place), ὄφρα, ἕως, etc. (of Time), freq. in [dialect] Ep., σαώτερος ὥς κε νέηαι Il.1.32
; ὄφρα κεν εὕδῃ Od.3.359
; ὅπως ἂν εἰδῇ.. φράσω A.Pr. 824
; ὅπως ἂν φαίνηται κάλλιστος Pl.Smp. 198e
; μηχανητέον ὅπως ἂν διαφύγῃ Grg. 481a
(where ὅπως with [tense] fut. ind. is the regular constr.); also after ὡς in Hdt., Trag., X.An.2.5.16, al., once in Th.6.91 (but [tense] fut. ind. is regular in [dialect] Att.); ἵνα final does not take ἄν or κε exc. ἵνα εἰδότες ἤ κε θάνωμεν ἤ κεν.. φύγοιμεν Od.12.156
( ἵνα = where in S.OC 405). μή, = lest, takes ἄν only with opt. in apodosis, as S.Tr. 631, Th.2.93.

II in [dialect] Ep. sts. with OPTATIVE as with subj. (always κε ([etym.] ν), exc. εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν Il.2.597
), εἴ κεν Ἄρης οἴχοιτο Od.8.353
; ὥς κε.. δοίη ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι that he might give her to whomsoever he might please, ib.2.54: so in Hdt. in final clauses, 1.75,99:—in Od.23.135 ὥς κέν τις φαίη, κέν belongs to Verb in apod., as in ὡς δ' ἂν ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο X.Cyr.7.5.81
.

2 rarely in oratio obliqua, where a relat. or temp. word retains an ἄν which it would have with subj. in direct form, S.Tr. 687, X.Mem.1.2.6, Isoc.17.15; ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθείην D.30.6
:—similarly after a preceding opt., οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο ἕως ἂν.. σκέψαιο Pl.Phd. 101d
.

III rarely with εἰ and INDICATIVE in protasis, only in [dialect] Ep.:

1 with [tense] fut. ind. as with subj.: αἴ κεν Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται Il.15.213
:—so with relat., οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι 1.175
.

2 with εἰ and a past tense of ind., once in Hom., εἰ δέ κ' ἔτι προτέρω γένετο δρόμος Il.23.526
; so Ζεὺς γάρ κ' ἔθηκε νῆσον εἴ κ' ἐβούλετο Orac. ap. Hdt.1.174, cf. Ar.Lys. 1099 (cod. R), A.R.1.197.

IV in later Greek, ἄν with relative words is used with INDICATIVE in all tenses, as ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο Ev.Marc.6.56
; ὅσ' ἂν πάσχετε PFay. 136
(iv A. D.); ἔνθ' ἂν πέφυκεν ἡ ὁλότης εἶναι Phlp. in Ph.436.19
; cf. ἐάν, ὅταν.

C with [tense] impf. and more rarely [tense] aor. ind. in ITERATIVE construction, to express elliptically a condilion fulfilled whenever an opportumty offered; freq. in Hdt. (not in Pi. or A.), κλαίεσκε ἂν καὶ ὀδυρέσκετο she would (i. e. used to) weep and lament, 3.119; εἶτα πῦρ ἂν οὐ παρῆν S.Ph. 295
; εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν.., ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν whenever they saw it, on each occasion, Th.7.71; διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν Pl.Ap. 22b
: inf. representing [tense] impf. of this constr., ἀκούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν.. ἀναχωρεῖν, i. e. I hear they used to retire ([etym.] ἀνεχώρουν ἄν), D.9.48.

D GENERAL REMARKS:

I POSITION OF ἄν.

1 in A, when ἄν does not coalesce with the relat. word (as in ἐάν, ὅταν), it follows directly or is separated only by other particles, as μέν, δέ, τε, ga/r, kai/, νυ, περ, etc.; as εἰ μέν κεν.. εἰ δέ κε Il.3.281
-4; rarely by τις, as ὅποι τις ἄν, οἶμαι, προσθῇ D.2.14
:—in Hom. and Hes. two such Particles may precede κε, as εἴ περ γάρ κεν Od.8.355
, cf. Il.2.123; εἰ γάρ τίς κε, ὃς μὲν γάρ κε, Hes.Op. 280, 357; rarely in Prose, ὅποι μὲν γὰρ ἄν D.4.45
; ὁπότερος οὖν ἄν Ar.Ra. 1420
: also ὁπόσῳ πλέον ἄν Pl.Lg. 647e
, cf. 850a; ὅπου τὸ πάλαι λεγόμενον ἂν γίγνηται 739c
.

2 in apodosis, ἄν may stand either next to its Verb (before or after it), or after some other emphatic word, esp. an interrog., a negative (e. g. οὐδ' ἂν εἷς, οὐκ ἂν ἔτι, etc.), or an important Adjective or Adverb; also after a participle which represents the protasis, λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; do you think they would have believed it if any one had told them? ([etym.] εἴ τις ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν), D.6.20.

3 ἄν is freq. separated from its inf. by such Verbs as οἴομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, etc., οὐκ ἂν οἴει .. ; freq. in Pl., Grg. 486d, al.; καὶ νῦν ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι I think that I should, X.Cyr.8.7.25; οὕτω γὰρ ἄν μοι δοκεῖ ἥ τε πόλις ἄριστα διοικεῖσθαι Aeschin.3.2
; ἃ μήτε προῄδει μηδεὶς μήτ' ἂν ᾠήθη τήμερον ῥηθῆναι (where ἄν belongs to ῥηθῆναι) D. 18.225:—in the phrase οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ, or οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ, ἄν belongs not to οἶδα, but to the Verb which follows, οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, for οὐκ οἶδα εἰ πείσαιμι ἄν, E.Med. 941, cf. Alc.48; οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ δυναίμην Pl. Ti. 26b
; οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ ἐκτησάμην X.Cyr.5.4.12
.

4 ἄν never begins a sentence, or even a clause after a comma, but may stand first after a parenthetic clause, ἀλλ', ὦ μέλ', ἄν μοι σιτίων διπλῶν ἔδει Ar. Pax
<*>37.

II REPETITION OF ἄν:—in apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three times with the same Verb, either to make the condition felt throughout a long sentence, or to emphasize certain words, ὥστ' ἄν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ' ἄν S.El. 333
, cf. Ant.69, A.Ag. 340, Th.1.76 (fin.), 2.41, Pl.Ap. 31a, Lys.20.15; ἀφανεῖς ἂν ὄντες οὐκ ἂν ὑμνήθημεν ἄν E.Tr. 1244
, cf. S.Fr. 739; attached to a parenthetical phrase, ἔδρασ' ἄν, εὖ τοῦτ' ἴσθ' ἄν, εἰ .. Id.OT 1438.

2 ἄν is coupled with κε ([etym.] ν ) a few times in Hom., as Il.11.187, 202, Od.5.361, al.; cf. ἤν περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλωσιν v.l. ib.18.318.

III ELLIPSIS OF VERB:—sts. the Verb to which ἄν belongs must be supplied, in Hom. only εἰμί, as τάτ' ἔλδεται ὅς κ' ἐπιδευής (sc. ᾖ) Il.5.481; ἀλλ' οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον) Ar.Nu.5; τί δ' ἂν δοκεῖ σοι Πρίαμος (sc. πρᾶξαι) , εἰ τάδ' ἤνυσεν; A.Ag. 935
:—so in phrases like πῶς γὰρ ἄν; and πῶς οὐκ ἄν (sc. εἴη); also in ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (or ὡσπερανεί), as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς (i. e. ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς ἦν) Pl.Grg. 479a; so τοσοῦτον ἐφρόνησαν, ὅσον περ ἂν (sc. ἐφρόνησαν) εἰ.. Isoc.10.48
:—so also when κἂν εἰ ( = καὶ ἂν εἰ) has either no Verb in the apod. or one to which ἄν cannot belong, Pl.R. 477a, Men. 72c; cf. κἄν:—so the Verb of a protasis containing ἄν may be understood, ὅποι τις ἂν προσθῇ, κἂν μικρὰν δύναμιν (i. e. καὶ ἐὰν προσθῇ) D.2.14; ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς (sc. ἴητε) X.An.1.3.6.

IV ELLIPSIS OF ἄν:—when an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses, ἄν is generally used only in the first and understood in the others: πείθοι' ἂν εἰ πείθοι'· ἀπειθοίης δ' ἴσως A.Ag. 1049
: even when the construction is continued in a new sentence, Pl.R. 352e, cf. 439b codd.: but ἄν is repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis, ib. 398a, cf. D.19.156 (where an opt. is implied with the third ὡς): rarely expressed with the second of two co-ordinate Verbs and understood with the first, τοῦτον ἂν.. θαρσοίην ἐγὼ καλῶς μὲν ἄρχειν, εὖ δ' ἂν ἄρχεσθαι θέλειν (i. e. καλῶς μὲν ἂν ἄρχοι, εὖ δ' ἂν θέλοι ἄρχεσθαι) S.Ant. 669.

------------------------------------

ἄν (B), [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att.,

A = ἐάν, ἤν, Th.4.46 codd., al.; freq. in Pl., ἂν σωφρονῇ Phd. 61b
; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ ib. 80d, cf. D.4.50; ἄν τ'.. ἄν τε Arist. Ath.48.4
: not common in earlier [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG1.2a5, 2.179b49, al.: but freq. later, SIG1044.27 (iv/iii B. C.), PPetr.2p.47 (iii B. C.), PPar.32.19 (ii B. C.), PTeb.110.8 (i B. C.), Ev.Jo.20.23, etc.

------------------------------------

ἄν (C) or [full] ἀν, Epic form of ἀνά, q. v.

------------------------------------

ἄν (D), shortened from ἄνα, v. sub ἀνά G.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄν
3 φέρω

φέρω ([dialect] Locr. [full] φάρω [ᾰ], IG9(1).334.5 (Oeanthea, v. B.C.)), only [tense] pres. and [tense] impf. (late 1 [tense] aor. [ per.] 3pl.

A ἤφεραν IG3.1379
), Il.21.458, etc.: [dialect] Ep. forms, [ per.] 2pl. imper. φέρτε Il.9.171
; [ per.] 2sg. subj. φέρῃσθα Call.Dian. 144
; [ per.] 3sg. subj. φέρῃσι Il.18.308
, Od.5.164, al.; [dialect] Ep. inf. φερέμεν Il.9.411
, al.: [tense] impf. ἔφερον, [dialect] Ep. φέρον 3.245
; also φέρεσκε, φέρεσκον ([ per.] 3pl.), Od.9.429, 10.108.

II [tense] fut. οἴσω Il.7.82
, etc.; [dialect] Dor. οἰσῶ Theoc.3.11
; [ per.] 1pl. οἰσεῦμες Id.15.133
; [ per.] 3pl. ηοίσοντι Tab.Heracl.1.150: the foll. act. forms are not [tense] fut. in sense, imper. οἶσε Od.22.106
, 481, Ar.Ach. 1099, 1101, 1122, Ra. 482; οἰσέτω Il.19.173
, Od.8.255; [ per.] 3pl. οἰσόντων Antim.15
; inf. οἴσειν Pi.P.4.102
, [dialect] Ep. οἰσέμεν Od.3.429
, οἰσέμεναι Il.3.120
, Od.8.399, etc.: [tense] aor. 1 inf. οἶσαι Ph.1.611
codd. ( ἀν-οῖσαι is prob. in Hdt.1.157):—[voice] Med., [tense] fut. οἴσομαι Il.22.217
, S.El. 969, etc. (in pass. sense, E.Or. 440, X.Oec.18.6; so [dialect] Dor. οἰσεῖται Archim.Fluit.1.7
, al.): [tense] fut. [voice] Pass. οἰσθήσομαι D.44.45
, Arist. Ph. 205a13, Archim.Fluit.1.3, al., ([etym.] ἐξ-) E.Supp. 561:—[voice] Pass., [tense] pf. προοῖσται Luc.Par.2
; cf. οἰστέον, οἰστός ([etym.] ἀν-οιστός).

III from ἐνεγκ- (not found in Hom. or Hdt., exc. as v.l. in Il.19.194, but in Pi.O.13.66, I.8(7).21, ([etym.] προς-) Id.P.9.36, also B.16.62, and normal in [dialect] Att. and Trag., also in codd.Hp., Epid.1.1.2, al.) come [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεγκα, and [tense] aor. 2 ἤνεγκον:—Indic., [ per.] 1sg. ἤνεγκον S.OC 521
(lyr.), 964, Ar.Ra. 1299, Th. 742, Lys. 944, ([etym.] δι-) Isoc.18.59, but ἤνεγκα S.El. 13
, E. Ion38, Aeschin.2.4, and in compos. with Preps.; [ per.] 2sg. always ἤνεγκας Ar.Av. 540
(lyr.), ([etym.] ἐξ-) S.Tr. 741 (in Ar.Th. 742, δέκα μῆνας αὔτ' ἐγὼ ἤνεγκον is answd. by ἤνεγκας σύ;); [ per.] 3sg. ἤνεγκε, common to both forms; dual δι-ηνεγκάτην Pl.Lg. 723b
; pl. always ἠνέγκαμεν, -ατε, -αν ([ per.] 3pl. ἀπ-ήνενκαν IG22.1620.37
, al., once ἀπ-ήνεγκον ib. 1414.2; δι-ηνέγκομεν is f.l. in X.Oec.9.8): imper., [ per.] 2sg. ἔνεγκε E. Heracl. 699
, Ar.Eq. 110, X.Mem.3.6.9 ( ἔνεγκον cj. Pors. in Anaxipp. 8); [ per.] 3sg. ἐνεγκάτω Ar. Pax 1149
(troch.), Th. 238, Pl.Phd. 116d, ([etym.] προς-) X.Smp.5.2; but ἐξ-ενεγκέτω IG12.63.33
, 76.61; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl. ἐνεγκόντω ib.5 (1).26.16 (Amyclae, ii/i B. C.); [ per.] 2pl. ἐξ-ενέγκατε Ar.Ra. 847
: subj. ἐνέγκω common to both forms: opt., [ per.] 1sg. ἐνέγκαιμι E.Hipp. 393
, Pl.Cri. 43c: [ per.] 3sg. ἐνέγκαι (cod.A, but - κοι cod.Laur.) S.Tr. 774, but ἐνέγκοι Id.Fr.84
(anap.), Pl.R. 330a, ([etym.] ξυν-) Th.6.20, etc.; [ per.] 2pl. ἐνέγκαιτε ( ἐνέγκατε codd.) E.Heracl. 751 (lyr.): inf. ἐνεγκεῖν A.Supp. 766
, S.OC 1599, IG22.40.18, etc., ([etym.] προς-) Pi.P.9.36, Hp.VM15; Hellenistic ἐνέγκαι Arist.Oec. 1349a27
([etym.] εἰς-), PAmh.2.30.35 (ii B. C.), Ev.Marc. 2.4 ([etym.] προς-), etc., found also in codd.Hp., Aff.3 ([etym.] προς-), Nat.Mul.19 ([etym.] δι-): part. ἐνεγκών Pi.I.8(7).21
, S.El. 692, Th.6.56, etc., ἐνέγκας IG22.1361.21
([etym.] εἰς-), 333.4, D.49.51 (and later, Demetr.Com.Nov.1.10 ([etym.] εἰς-), Arist.Oec. 1351a14, etc.; in X. we find ἐξ-ενεγκόντες Mem.1.2.53
, and δι-ενεγκοῦσα, συν-ενεγκόντες, vv. ll. in ib.2.2.5, An.6.5.6):— [voice] Med., only ἠνεγκάμην, Ar.Ec.76 ([etym.] ἐξ-), etc. (exc. imper. ἐνεγκοῦ S.OC 470
); [ per.] 2sg. ἠνέγκω E.Supp. 583
, X.Oec.7.13; [ per.] 3sg. ἠνέγκατο S.Tr. 462
, Pl.R. 406b, etc.; [ per.] 1pl. ἠνεγκάμεθα Id. Ion 530b
, ([etym.] προ-) Phlb. 57a; inf. εἰς-ενέγκασθαι Isoc.15.188
: part. ἐνεγκάμενος Aeschin.1.131
, ([etym.] ἀπ-) X.Ages.6.2.

IV from ἐνεικ- comes [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεικα, found mostly in [dialect] Ion. (but not in codd. Hp.), [dialect] Ep. and Lyr., also at Cos (v. infr.) and implied elsewh. in pass. forms (v. infr. v):—the endings are those of [tense] aor. 1, exc. in imper. ἔνεικε Od.21.178
, inf. ἐνεικέμεν (v.l. ἐνεγκέμεν) Il.19.194, ἐνείκην (v. infr.), and part. μετ-ενεικών, ἐξενικοῦσι (v. infr.), cf. συνενείκομαι:—[ per.] 1sg. ἀν-ένεικα Od.11.625
; [ per.] 2sg. ἀπ-ένεικας Il.14.255
; [ per.] 3sg. ἤνεικε Od.18.300
, al., Hdt.2.146, [dialect] Ep. ἔνεικε Il.15.705
, al.; [ per.] 1pl. ἐνείκαμεν Od.24.43
; [ per.] 3pl. ἤνεικαν Hdt.3.30
, [dialect] Ep. ἔνεικαν Il.9.306
; imper. [ per.] 2sg. ἔνεικον Anacr.62.3
; [ per.] 2pl., ἐνείκατε Od. 8.393
; [ per.] 3pl. ἐνεικάντων Schwyzer 688
B 3 (Chios, v B. C.); inf. ἐνεῖκαι Il.18.334
, Pi.P.9.53, Hdt.1.32; ἐνεικέμεν (v. supr.); [dialect] Aeol. ἐνείκην Alc.Oxy.1788
Fr.15ii 20; part. ἐνείκας Il.17.39
, ([etym.] ἀν-) Hdt.2.23; μετ-ενεικών Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).22
(Cos, iii B. C.):—[voice] Med., [ per.] 3sg. ἀν-ενείκατο Il.19.314
; [ per.] 3pl. ἠνείκαντο 9.127
, Hdt.1.57, ([etym.] ἐς-) 7.152; part. ἐνεικάμενος Alc.35.4
.

2 [tense] aor. 1 ἤνῐκα is found in the foll. dialect forms: [ per.] 3sg. ἤνικε IG42(1).121.110
(Epid., iv B. C.); ἤνικεν SIG239
Bi11 (Delph., iv B. C.); ἀν-ήνικε IG4.757A12
, al. (Troezen, ii B. C.); ἀπ-ήνικε ib.42(1).103.16, al. (Epid., iv B. C.); but ἤνῑκε is prob. written for ἤνεικε in IG4.801.3 (Troezen, vi B. C.); [ per.] 1pl. ἀν-ηνίκαμες [ῐ] GDI 3591b21 ([place name] Calymna); [ per.] 3pl. ἤνικαν SIG239
Bi 17 (Delph., iv B. C.), IG 12(2).15.15 (Mytil., iii B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj. ἐνίκει Berl.Sitzb.1927.161
([place name] Cyrene); ἐς-ενίκη, and inf. ἐς-ένικαι, IG12(2).645b43,39 (Nesus, iv B. C.); part. (dat. pl.) ἐξ-ενικοῦσι IG4.823.49
(Troezen, iv B. C.); so in later Gr., εἰς-ήνικα Supp.Epigr.7.381
,382 (Dura-Europos, iii A. D.); ἤνιγκα ib.383 (ibid., iii A. D.):—[voice] Med., part. ἐξ-ε[νικ]άμενος IG12
(2).526a5 (Eresus, iv B. C.).

b [dialect] Boeot. [tense] aor. 1 in [ per.] 3pl. εἴνιξαν IG7.2418.24
(Thebes, iv B. C.); [ per.] 1sg. ἤνειγξα Hdn.Gr.2.374.

V other tenses: [tense] pf. ἐνήνοχα D.21.108
, 22.62, ([etym.] ἐξ-) Luc.Pr.Im.15,17, ([etym.] μετ-) Pl.Criti. 113a, ([etym.] συν-) v. l. in X.Mem.3.5.22:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. ἐνεχθήσομαι Arist.Ph. 205b12
, Archim.Fluit.2.2, al., ([etym.] ἐπ-) Th.7.56, ([etym.] κατ-) Isoc.13.19: [tense] aor. ἠνέχθην X.An.4.7.12
and freq. in compds.; [dialect] Ion. ἀπ-ηνείχθην Hdt.1.66
, etc.; ([etym.] περι-) ib.84; [ per.] 3pl. written ἠνείχτθησαν in Schwyzer 707B9 (Ephesus, vi B. C.); [dialect] Dor. part. ἐξ-ενειχθείς IG42(1).121.115
(Epid., iv B. C.); Hellenistic ἐνεγχθείς PCair.Zen.327.42
(iii B. C.), ([etym.] συμπερι-) IPE12.32A31,78, B70 (Olbia, iii B. C.); in dialects, [ per.] 3sg. indic. ἀπ-ηνίχθη IG42(1).103.111
(Epid., iv B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj. ἐξενιχθῇ ib.12(5).593 A23 (Ceos, v B. C.), Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).21 (Cos, iii B. C.); [dialect] Boeot. ἐν-ενιχθεῖ IG7.3172.150
(Thespiae, iii B. C.); part. (neut.) ἐπ-ενιχθέν Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).53
(Telos, iv B. C., ined.); [dialect] Att. [tense] pf. ἐνήνεγμαι, ἐνήνεκται Pl.R. 584d
, εἰς-ενήνεκται E. Ion 1340
; ἀν-ενήνεγκται IG12.91.4
; ἐπαν-ενήνειγκται ib.22.1607a7; [dialect] Ion. ἐξ-ενηνειγμένος Hdt.8.37
; [dialect] Att. [tense] plpf. προς-ενήνεκτο X.HG4.3.20
; part. κατ-, μετ-ενηνεγμένος Plb.10.30.2
, Str.13.1.12. (With φέρω cf. Lat.fero, OE. beran, Skt. bhárati 'bear'; οἴσω is of uncertain origin; ἐνεγκ- is prob. redupl. ἐγκ- ( ἐνεκ- in [voice] Pass. forms and in δουρηνεκής, etc.), cogn. with Skt. náśati 'attain,' Lat. nanciscor, Lith. nèšti 'carry, bear'; ἐνεικ- ([etym.] ἐνῐκ-) is of uncertain origin; the glosses ἐνέεικαν· ἤνεγκαν, and ἐνεείκω· ἐνέγκω (Hsch.) are not corroborated.)

A [voice] Act.,

I bear or carry a load, ἐν ταλάροισι φέρον μελιηδέα καρπόν Il.18.568
; μέγα ἔργον, ὃ οὐ δύο γ' ἄνδρε φέροιεν 5.303
; ἦγον μὲν μῆλα, φέρον δ' εὐήνορα οἶνον Od.4.622
; χοάς A.Ch.15
; φ. ἐπ' ὤμοις S.Tr. 564
; χερσὶν φ. Id.Ant. 429
; φ. ὅπλα βραχίονι E.Hec.14
; bear (as a device) on one's shield, A.Th. 559, etc.; γαστέρι κοῦρον φ., of a pregnant woman, Il.6.59; φ. ὑπὸ ζώνην or ζώνης ὕπο, A.Ch. 1000(992), E.Hec. 762: in Trag. stronger than ἔχω, ἁγνὰς αἵματος χεῖρας φ. to have hands clean from blood, E.Hipp. 316 (v.l. φορεῖς) ; ἀλαὸν ὄμμα φέρων Id.Ph. 1531
(lyr.); γλῶσσαν εὔφημον φ. A.Ch. 581
, cf. Supp. 994; καλὸν φ. στόμα S.Fr. 930
codd. (nisi leg. φορῇ) ; ἄψοφον βάσιν φ. Id.Tr. 967
(lyr.).

II bear, convey, with collat. notion of motion, freq. in Hom., πῇ δὴ.. τόξα φέρεις; Od.21.362
; πρόσω φ. ib. 369; εἴσω φέρω σ' ἐντεῦθεν Ar.V. 1444
, cf. Pl.Lg. 914b; πόδες φέρον Il.6.514
; πέδιλα τά μιν φέρον 24.341
, etc.; of horses, 2.838; ἵππω.. ἅρμα οἴσετον 5.232
, etc.; of ships, Od.16.323, cf. Il.9.306; τὰ σώματα τῶν ζῴων συνέστηκεν ἐκ τοῦ φέροντος καὶ τοῦ φερομένου Diocl. Fr.17
.

b of persons, bring to bear, μένος or μένος χειρῶν ἰθύς τινος φέρειν hurl one's strength right upon or against him, Il.16.602, 5.506; φ. τὴν ὀργήν, τὴν αἰτίαν ἐπί τινα, Plb.21.31.8, 33.11.2.

c lead, direct, τὴν πόλιν Plu.Luc.6
.

2 of wind, bear along, [πνοιὴ Ζεφύρου] φ. νῆάς τε καὶ αὐτούς Od.10.26
; [σχεδίην] ἄνεμοι φέρον ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα 5.330
, cf. 4.516, Il.19.378, etc.; ἐπέλασσε φέρων ἄνεμος Od.3.300
, 7.277, cf. 5.111, etc.: abs., ὁ βορέας ἔξω τοῦ Πόντου εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φέρει is fair for Greece, X.An.5.77: metaph., ὅπῃ ἂν ὁ λόγος ὥσπερ πνεῦμα φ. Pl.R. 394d
; φ. τινὰ φρένες δύσαρκτοι A.Ch. 1023
, cf. Th. 687 (lyr.):—[voice] Pass., v. infr. B.

III endure, suffer, λυγρά Od.18.135
; ἄτην Hdt.1.32
; χαλινόν, ζυγόν, A.Ag. 1066, 1226; πημονάς, τύχας, Id.Pers. 293, E.Or. 1024; ξυμφοράς Th.2.60
; τὰς οὐ προσηκούσας ἁμαρτίας Antipho 3.2.10
; also of food, ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φ. X.Cyr.8.2.21
; of strong wine, bear, admit, καὶ τὰ τρία φέρων καλῶς, i.e. three parts of water, instead of ἴσον ἴσῳ, Ar.Eq. 1188, cf. Ach. 354; so τὰς ἐπιδείξεις.. φέρουσιν αὐτοῦ (sc. Ἰσοκράτους) οἱ λόγοι, τοὺς δὲ ἐν ἐκκλησίαις.. ἀγῶνας οὐχ ὑπομένουσι D.H.Isoc.2
: metaph., ᾗ φέρειν πέφυκε Pl.Ti. 48a
.

2 freq. with modal words, πήματα κόσμῳ φ. Pi.P.3.82
; σιγῇ κακά E.Hec. 738
; ὀργῇ τὸν πόλεμον Th.1.31
; θυμῷ φ. Id.5.80
; χαρᾷ φ. τι J.AJ19.1.13
: esp. with an Adv., [ὕβριν] ῥηϊδίως φ. Hes.Op. 215
; δεινῶς, βαρέως, πικρῶς, χαλεπῶς φέρειν τι, bear a thing impatiently, take it ill or amiss, Hdt.2.121.γ, 5.19, E. Ion 610, Pl.R. 330a, etc.; δυσπετῶς, βαρυστόνως φ., A.Pr. 752, Eu. 794; προθύμως φέρειν τὸν πόλεμον to be zealous about the war, Hdt.9.18,40; προθύμως τὰ τοῦ πολέμου ἔφερον Th.8.36
; αἶσαν φέρειν ὡς ῥᾷστα A.Pr. 104
; συμφορὴν ὡς κουφότατα φ. Hdt.1.35
; ῥᾳδίως φ. Pl.Grg. 522d
, al.; εὐπετῶς φ. S.Fr. 585
, X.Mem.2.1.6; εὐπόρως ( εὐφόρως Brunck) ἐνεγκεῖν S.Ph. 873
; εὐμενῶς, εὐχερῶς φ., D.Ep. 3.45, Pl.R. 474e; these phrases are used mostly c. acc. rei; also c. part., βαρέως ἤνεικε ἰδών Hdt.3.155
, cf. Ar.Th. 385, etc.; φ. ἐλαφρῶς.. λαβόντα ζυγόν Pi.P.2.93
; ῥᾳδίως φέρεις ἡμᾶς ἀπολείπων Pl. Phd. 63a
: c. gen., τοῦ ἐνδεοῦς χαλεπώτερον φ. Th.1.77
, cf. 2.62; ἐπί τινι, χαλεπῶς φ. ἐπὶ τῇ πολιορκίᾳ X.HG7.4.21
, cf. Isoc.12.232; πράως ἐπὶ τοῖς γιγνομένοις φ. D.58.55
: c. dat. only, βαρέως φέρειν τοῖς παροῦσι, τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ, X.An.1.3.3, HG3.4.9, cf. 5.1.29; later, χαλεπῶς φ. διά τι, πρός τι, D.S.17.111, Jul.Or.1.17c codd.

IV bring, fetch, εἰ.. θεὸς αὐτὸν ἐνείκαι Od.21.196
; φ. ἄποινα Il.24.502
; ἄρνε 3
, 120, cf. Sapph.95; ὕδωρ, οἶνον, Anacr.62.1; ἔντεα Il.18.191
; τόξα Od.21.359
; κνημῖδας A.Th. 675
; δᾷδα Ar.Nu. 1490
, etc.; γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ Hdt.7.131
:—[voice] Med., carry or bring with one, or for one's own use, ποδάνιπτρα Od.19.504
; οἶνον Alc.35
, cf. Hdt.4.67, 7.50, X. Mem.3.14.1; φερνὰς δόμοις E.Andr. 1282
; fetch, Od.2.410; χοὰς ἐκ κρήνης S.OC 470
.

2 bring, offer, present, δῶρα Od.8.428
, etc.; μέλος Pi.P.2.3
; χοάς τινι A.Ch. 487
; φ. πέπλον δώρημά τινι S.Tr. 602
; πρός τινα δῶρα X.An.7.3.31
; χάριν τινὶ φ. grant any one a favour, do him a kindness, Il.5.211, Od.5.307, al.; ἐπὶ ἦρα φ. τινί Il.1.572
, Od.3.164, etc.; φ. τισὶ εὐνοίας, ὄνησιν ἀστοῖς, A.Supp. 489, S.OC 287; but after Hom., χάριν τινὶ φ. show gratitude to him, Pi.O.10(11).17; μῆνιν φ. τινί cherish wrath against.. A.Niob. in PSI11.1208.12.

b = ἄγω iv. 1, ἄχρι νῦν καθ' ὥραν ἔτους λέγονται πένθος ἐπὶ Μελεάγρῳ φέρειν Ant.Lib.2.7
; Ἰάλεμος· ὁ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀπολωλόσιν ἀνίαν φέρων, Suid.:—[voice] Med., τοῦ γονέως ἐφ' ᾧ γε τὸ πένθος φέρεσθε Phalar.Ep.103.1
.

3 bring, produce, cause, [ἀστὴρ] φέρει πυρετὸν βροτοῖσιν Il.22.31
; ὄσσαν.. ἥ τε φ. κλέος ἀνθρώποισι Od.1.283
, cf. 3.204; φ. κακόν, πῆμα, ἄλγεα, etc., work one woe, Il.8.541, Od.12.231, 427, etc.; δηϊοτῆτα φ. bring war, 6.203; ἐπ' ἀλλήλοισι φ. Ἄρηα Il.3.132
, cf. 8.516; πόλεμον Hes.Sc. 150
; θάνατον φ. B.5.134
; τοῦτο εὐδοξίαν σοι οἴσει Pl.Ep. 312c
; τὸ σωθῆναι τὸ ψεῦδος φέρει S.Ph. 109
; τέχναι.. φόβον φέρουσιν μαθεῖν A.Ag. 1135
(lyr.); ὥσπερ τὸ δίκαιον ἔφερε as justice brought with it, brought about, i.e. as was just, no more than just, Hdt.5.58; ἀν' ὄ κα φέρῃ ὁ λόγος ὁ ταμία Φιλοκλέος IG42(1).77.13
(Epid., ii B. C.); of a calculation, yield a result, Vett.Val.349.27; produce, adduce, bring forward, παραδείγματα Isoc.7.6
, etc.; πάσας αἰτίας D.58.22
; ἁρμόττουσαν εἰκόνα Id.61.10
:—[voice] Pass., εἰς τὴν συνηγορίαν.. τοιαῦτά τινα φέρεται Sor.2.3
.

b bring or carry with one, involve, τὸ πᾶν ἡμῖν τοῦ πολέμου φέρουσιν αἱ νέες Hdt.8.62
; οὐ ξύλων ἀγὼν ὁ τὸ πᾶν φέρων ἐστὶ ἡμῖν, ἀλλ' ἀνδρῶν ib. 100.

4 μῦθον φ. τινί bring one word, Il.10.288, 15.202; ἀγγελίην φ. bring a message, ib. 175, Od.1.408; λόγον Pi.P.8.38
; ἐπιστολὰς φ. τινί S.Aj. 781
, cf. Tr. 493; ἐπιστολήν X.Ages.8.3
: hence, tell, announce, πευθώ, φάτιν, A.Th. 370, Ag.9; σαφές τι πρᾶγος Id.Pers. 248
(troch.), cf. Ag. 639, etc.; report, ἀγήν (breakages) PCair.Zen. 15r27 (iii B. C.); φ. κεχωνευκώς reports that he has.., ib.741.26, cf. 147.4, 268.24 (all iii B. C.); enter, book a payment made, PBaden47.12:—[voice] Med., λόγους φ. E.Supp. 583
; but also ἀγγελίας ἔπος οἴσῃ thou shalt have it brought thee, receive, Id.Ph. 1546 (lyr.); μαντήϊα.. φέρονται Hes.Fr.134.9
:—[voice] Pass., θάνατον ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου the death of the testator must be announced, Ep.Heb.9.16.

5 pay something due or owing, φόρον τέσσαρα τάλαντα φ. pay as a tax or tribute, Th.4.57, cf. IG12.57.9, Pl.Plt. 298a, PCair.Zen.467.7 (iii B. C.); δασμόν X.An.5.5.10
; σύνοδον φ. subscribe to the expense of a meeting, IG22.1012.14, 1326.6; χρήματα πᾶσι τάξαντες φ. Th.1.19
; μισθὸν φ. X.Cyr.1.6.12
(but usu., receive, draw, pay, μισθὸν δύο δραχμὰς τῆς ἡμέρας Ar.Ach.66
; τέτταρας τῆς ἡμέρας ὀβολοὺς φέρων Men.357
; αἱ νῆες μισθὸν ἔφερον Th. 3.17
, cf. X.An.1.3.21, Oec.1.6); φ. ἐννέα ὀβολοὺς τῆς μνᾶς τόκους Lys.Fr.1.2
, cf. Lycurg.23; also of property, bring in, yield as rent, φ. μίσθωσιν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ Is.5.35
.

6 apply, refer, τι ἐπί τι Pl. Ti. 37e
, Chrm. 163d, R. 478b, cf. Plb.3.36.7, al.; φ. τὰ πράγματα ἐπί τινα confer powers upon, Id.2.50.6.

7 ψῆφον φ. give one's vote, A.Eu. 674, 680, And.1.2, Is.11.18; ψῆφος καθ' ἡμῶν οἴσεται ([voice] Pass.) E.Or. 440; περὶ ταύτης ἡ ψῆφος οἰσθήσεται D.44.45
; ὑπὲρ ἀγῶνος Lycurg.7
, cf. 11: hence φ. τινά appoint or nominate to an office, φ. χορηγόν D.20.130
, 39.7, cf. Pl.Lg. 753d, Arist.Pol. 1266a10:—[voice] Pass., ibid.; ὅπως φέρηται ἐν τῷ στρατιωτικῷ UPZ15.10
(ii B. C.); τῶν φερομένων ἐν Κλεοπάτρᾳ κληρούχων PRein.10.13
, al. (ii B. C.); φερομένου μου ἐν τῇ συνοχῇ since I am enrolled in prison, i.e. am in prison, BGU1821.21 (i B. C.):—[voice] Med., choose, adopt, ταύταν φ. βιοτάν E.Andr. 785
(lyr.).

V bring forth, produce, whether of the earth or of trees, φ. ἄρουρα φάρμακα Od.4.229
; ἄμπελοι φ. οἶνον 9.110
; [νῆσος] φ. ὥρια πάντα ib. 131, cf. Hes.Op. 117; [οὐ] γῆ καρπὸν ἔφερε Hdt.6.139
; γύαι φ. βίοτον A.Fr.196.5
, cf. Pi.N.11.41, E.Hec. 593, etc.: abs., bear fruit, be fruitful, εὖτ' ἂν τάδε πάντα φέρῃσι h.Merc.91
; ἡ γῆ ἔφερε ( καρπόν add. codd. quidam) Hdt.5.82; αἱ ἄμπελοι φέρουσιν X.Oec.20.4
; also of living beings, τόπος ἄνδρας φ. Pl.Ti. 24c
; ἤνεγκεν αὐτὸν Λαοδίκεια Philostr. VS1.25.1
;
ἡ ἐνεγκοῦσα
one's country, Hld.2.29
, Lib.Or. 2.66, al., Chor.p.81 B., Lyd.Mag.3.26, dub. in Supp.Epigr.4.439 (Milet.) without Art. (also ἡ ἐνεγκαμένη Jul.Ep. 202
); or Mother Earth, M.Ant.4.48: generally, create, form, Πηνειὸς Τέμπη φ. Philostr.Im.1.25
; [τὰ βρέφη] ἄρχεται φέρειν τοὺς ὀδόντας Aët.4.9
; φ. τοὺς κυνόδοντας Gp.16.1.14
.

VI carry off or away, Κῆρες ἔβαν θανάτοιο φέρουσαι Il.2.302
; φ. τινὰ ἐκ πόνου 14.429
, 17.718, etc.; of winds, [ἔπος] φέροιεν ἀναρπάξασαι ἄελλαι may the winds sweep away the word, Od.8.409; of a river, Hdt.1.189:—[voice] Med., carry off with one, Od.15.19.

2 carry away as booty or prize, ἔναρα, τεύχεα, Il.6.480, 17.70; αἶγα λέοντε φ. 13.199
; δεῖπνον φ., of Harpies, A.Eu.51; ἐνέχυρα βίᾳ φ. Antipho 6.11
; in the phrase φέρειν καὶ ἄγειν (cf. ἄγω 1.3
), IG12.69.19; φέροντα ἢ ἄγοντα Lex ap.D.23.60; αἴ κα.. ἄγῃ ἢ φέρῃ Leg.Gort.5.37
; ἥρπαζον καὶ ἔφερον Lys.20.17
; κείρων ἢ φέρων IG12(9).90.10
(Tamynae, iv B. C.); αἴ τίς κα.. φέρει τι τῶν ἐν τᾷ ἱαρᾷ γᾷ Tab.Heracl.1.128
; of a divorced wife, αἰ δέ τι ἄλλο φέροι τῶ ἀνδρός, πέντε στατῆρανς καταστασεῖ κὤτι κα φέρῃ αὐτόν Leg.Gort.3.2
; φέρειν alone, rob, plunder, θεῶν ἱερά E.Hec. 804
; ἀλλήλους Th.1.7
; abs., SIG38.23 (Teos, v B. C.):—[voice] Pass., φερόμενοι Βακχῶν ὕπο E.Ba. 759
:—[voice] Med. in same sense, ἔναρα Il.22.245
; πελέκεας οἶκόνδε φ. 23.856
; ἀτερπέα δαῖτα Od.10.124
, cf. 15.378.

3 carry off, gain, esp. by toil or trouble, win, achieve, both [voice] Act. and [voice] Med., ἤ κε φέρῃσι μέγα κράτος ἦ κε φεροίμην Il.18.308
; φέρειν τρίποδα Hes.Op. 657
; τἀπινίκια S.El. 692
; τιμήν Ar. Av. 1278
; τἀριστεῖα, τὰ νικητήρια, Pl.R. 468c, Lg. 657e; πέρα.. οὐδὲν φ. S.OC 651
; ἐκ σοῦ πάντ' ἄνευ φόβου φ. Id.OT 590
; τίς.. πλέον τᾶς εὐδαιμονίας φέρει ἤ .. ; ib. 1190 (lyr.), cf. El. 1088 (lyr.); in bad sense, μείζω τὴν αἰσχύνην φ. Pl.Lg. 671e
: also, receive one's due, φ. χάριν S.OT 764
; ὡς τοῦτό γ' ἔρξας δύο φέρῃ δωρήματα Id.Ph. 117
; μισθὸν φέρειν (v. supr. iv.5); of a priest's perquisites, φέρει ὁ ἱαρεὺς γέρη σκέλη κτλ. BMus.Inscr.968
A 9 ([place name] Cos), cf. IG12.24.10, al., SIG56.35 (Argos, v B. C.):—[voice] Med. (v. ad init.), win for oneself, κῦδος οἴσεσθαι Il.22.217
; δέπας, τεύχεα, carry off as a prize, 23.663, 809, al.; ἀέθλια or ἄεθλον φ. carry off, win a prize, 9.127, 23.413; τὰ πρῶτα φέρεσθαι (sc. ἄεθλα) 23.275, 538; οὐ σμικρὸν ἆθλον τῆς ἐρωτικῆς μανίας φέρονται Pl.Phdr. 256d
; of perquisites, τὸ.. σκέλος τοὶ ἱαρομνάμονες φερόσθω (i. e. φερούσθω from Φερόνσθω) IG42(1).40.13 (Epid., v/iv B. C.): hence οὐ τὰ δεύτερα Hdt.8.104
; πλέον φέρεσθαι get more or a larger share for onself, gain the advantage over any one, τινος Hdt.7.211, cf. S.OT 500 (lyr.), E.Hec. 308; ταῦτα ἐπὶ σμικρόν τι ἐφέροντο τοῦ πολέμου this they received as a small help towards the war, Hdt.4.129; ἠνείκατο παρὰ Ἐγεσταίων τὰ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος 5.47
; ἴδια κέρδεα προσδεκόμενοι παρὰ τοῦ Πέρσεω οἴσεσθαι 6.100
; χάριν φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῶν And.2.9
; φ. τὴν ἀπέχθειαν αὐτῶν Antipho 3.4.2
; ὀνείδη Pl.Lg. 762a
; εὐσέβειαν ἐκ πατρὸς οἴσῃ S.El. 969
; δάκρυ πρὸς τῶν κλυόντων A.Pr. 638
; ἀπό τινος βοσκάν Id.Eu. 266
(lyr.); ἐξ ἀνανδρίας τοὔνομα Aeschin.1.131
: generally, get for one's own use and profit, take and carry away, esp. to one's own home, τοῦ.. πάμπρωτα παρ' ἀγλαὰ δῶρα φέροιο Il.4.97
: hence φέρειν or φέρεσθαι is often used pleon., v. infr. xi.

VII abs., of roads or ways, lead to a place, ὁδὸν φέρουσαν ἐς ἱρόν Hdt.2.122
, cf. 138; τὴν φέρουσαν ἄνω (sc. ὁδόν) Id.9.69; τῆς μὲν ἐς ἀριστερὴν ἐπὶ Καρίης φ., τῆς δὲ ἐς δεξιὴν ἐς Σάρδις Id.7.31
; ἐπὶ Σοῦσα X.An.3.5.15
; ἁπλῆ οἶμος εἰς Ἅιδου φέρει A.Fr. 239
; ἡ ἐς Θήβας φέρουσα ὁδός Th.3.24
(but ἡ ἐπ' Ἀθηνῶν φέρουσα ibid.); also ἡ θύρα ἡ εἰς τὸν κῆπον φ. the door leading to the garden, D.47.53; αἱ εἰς τὴν πόλιν φ. πύλαι, αἱ ἐπὶ τὸ τεῖχος φ. κλίμακες, X.HG7.2.7, cf. PMich.Zen.38.27 (iii B. C.), Plb.10.12.3.

2 of a district or tract of country, stretch, extend to or towards, φέρειν ἐπί or ἐς θάλασσαν Hdt.4.99
; ἐς τὴν μεσόγαιαν ib. 100; πρὸς νότον Id.7.201
; ἡ ἀπὸ δυσμῶν αὐτῆς (sc. τῆς Κιμβρικῆς) καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄλβιν φέρουσα Ptol.Geog.2.11.2
, cf. 3.

b of time, τῇ νυκτὶ τῇ φερούσῃ εἰς τὴν β τοῦ Παχών PPetr.3p
.x (iii B. C.), cf. PTeb.61 (b) 288 (ii B. C.), BGU1832.5 (i B. C.), etc.

3 metaph., lead to or towards, be conducive to, ἐς αἰσχύνην φέρει Hdt.1.10
; τὰ ἐς ἄκεσιν φέροντα Id.4.90
; ἐς βλάβην, ἐς φόβον φέρον, S.OT 517, 991; εἰς ὄκνον E.Supp. 295
: esp. in good sense, tend, conduce to one's interest, ἐπ' ἀμφότερά τοι φέρει (impers.) ταῦτα ποιέειν Hdt.3
. 134; so τὰ πρὸς τὸ ὑγιαίνειν φέροντα X.Mem.4.2.31
; τροφαὶ μέγα φ. εἰς ἀρετάν E.IA 562
(lyr.); μέγα τι οἰόμεθα φέρειν (sc. κοινωνίαν γυναικῶν τε καὶ παίδων) εἰς πολιτείαν Pl.R. 449d
; τὰ καλὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα εἰς ἀρετῆς κτῆσιν φ. ib. 444e, cf. X.Cyr.8.1.42; τοῦτο ἔφερεν αὐτῷ was for his good, M.Ant.5.8.

b point to, refer to a thing, ἐς τί ὑμῖν ταῦτα φαίνεται φέρειν; Hdt.1.120
; φωνὴ φέρουσα πρός τινα addressed to him, Id.1.159; ἐς ἀρηΐους ἀγῶνας φέρον τὸ μαντήϊον Id.9.33
, cf. 6.19; [ὄψις] φέρει ἐπὶ πᾶσαν γῆν refers to.., extends over.., Id.7.19; τὰ ἴχνη τῆς ὑποψίας εἰς τοῦτον φ. point to him, Antipho 2.3.10; πρός τινας Pl.R. 538c
; ταύτῃ <ὁ> νόος ἔφερε Hdt.9.120
; ἡ τοῦ δήμου φέρει γνώμη, ὡς .., the people's opinion inclines to this, that.., Id.4.11; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Th.1.79
: c. inf., τῶν ἡ γνώμη ἔφερε συμβάλλειν whose opinion inclined to giving battle, Hdt.6.110, cf. 5.118; πλέον ἔφερέ οἱ ἡ γνώμη κατεργάσεσθαι his opinion inclined rather to the view.., Hdt.8.100, cf. 3.77.

VIII carry or have in the mouth, i. e. speak of, πολύν τινα ἐν ταῖς διαβολαῖς φέρειν Aeschin.3.223
; use a word, οὐκ οἶδα καθ' ὁποτέρου τούτων οἱ παλαιοὶ τὸ τῆς ζειᾶς ἔφερον ὄνομα Gal.Vict.Att.6
, cf. 7.644, 15.753, 876; record an event, οἱ δευτέρῳ μετὰ τὴν ἔξοδον.. ἔτει φέροντες αὐτήν D.H.1.63
: more freq. in [voice] Pass., πονηρῶς, εὖ, φέρεσθαι, to be ill or well spoken of, X.HG1.5.17, 2.1.6; ἀτίμως ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων φ. Pl.Ep. 328e
; abs., φέρεται [the report] is carried about, i.e. it is said, c. acc. et inf., τοιόνδε φέρεται πρῆγμα γίνεσθαι Hdt.8.104
(v.l.); ἐν χρόνοις φέρεται μνημονευομένοις is recorded as occurring within historical times, Str.1.3.15; ὅτε καὶ Δημόκριτος φέρεται τελευτήσας Sor.Vit.Hippocr.11
; κρίνομεν.. τὰ γραφέντα ὑφ' ἡμῶν προστάγματα ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς νόμοις φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῖν OGI331.60
(Pergam., ii B. C.);
ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα φέρεται
are in use, Ptol.Geog.7.4.11
; of literary works, to be in circulation, ἐπιστόλιον αὐτοῦ τοιοῦτον φέρεται Plu.2.808a
, cf. 209e, 832d, 833c, al., Jul.Or.6.189b, Gp.2.35.8, Eun.VSp.456 B.; πρόλογοι διττοὶ φέρονται Arg.E.Rh.; ὁ στίχος οὗτος ἔν τισιν οὐ φέρεται Sch.E. Ph. 377, cf. Sch.Il.8.557.

2 of words, φέρεσθαι ἐπί τι to refer to something, A.D.Pron.61.5, Synt.21.14, al.

IX imper. φέρε like ἄγε, as Adv., come, now, well,

1 before another imper., φέρε γὰρ σήμαινε A.Pr. 296
(anap.); φέρ' εἰπὲ δή μοι S.Ant. 534
; φ. δή μοι τόδε εἰπέ Pl.Cra. 385b
; so φέρετε.. πειρᾶσθε Hdt.4.127
.

2 before [ per.] 1sg. or pl. of subj. used imperatively, φέρε ἀκούσω, φέρε στήσωμεν, Hdt.1.11,97; φ. δὲ νῦν.. φράσω Id.2.14
; φέρ' ἴδω, τί δ' ἥσθην; Ar.Ach.4
; φέρε δὴ κατίδω Id. Pax 361
, cf. 959; φ. δὴ ἴδωμεν, φ. δὴ σκεψώμεθα, Pl.Grg. 455a, Prt. 330b, cf. E.Or. 1281 (lyr.), Ph. 276, etc.: less freq. before 2 pers., φέρε.. μάθῃς S.Ph. 300
.

3 before a rhetorical question, φέρε.. τροπαῖα πῶς ἀναστήσεις; E.Ph. 571
; φ. δὴ νῦν.. τί γαμεῖθ' ἡμᾶς; Ar.Th. 788
(anap.), cf. Ach. 541, Pl.R. 348c; φ. μῶν οὐκ ἀνάγκη .. ; Id.Lg. 805d; φ. πρὸς θεῶν πῶς .. ; Id.Grg. 514d; freq. in phrase φέρε γάρ, φέρε τίς γὰρ οὗτος; Ar.Nu. 218
; φ. γὰρ πρὸς τίνας χρὴ πολεμεῖν; Isoc.4.183
, cf. Antipho 5.36; also φ. δή Pl.Grg. 455a
, al.: usu. first in a sentence, but τὴν ἀνδρείαν δὲ φ. τί θῶμεν; Id.Lg. 633c
, etc.

4 φέρε δή, ἐάν πῃ διαλλαχθῶμεν .. come let us see if we can.., Id.Cra. 430a.

5 φέρε c. inf., suppose, grant that.. φ. λέγειν τινά Plu.2.98b
; φ. εἰπεῖν let us say, D.Chr.31.93, 163, Porph.Abst.3.3; οἷον φ. εἰ. Iamb. in Nic.p.47
P., al. ( οἷον φέρε alone, Hierocl. in CA11p.439M.).

X part. neut. τὸ φέρον, as Subst., destiny, fate, τὸ φ. ἐκ θεοῦ [καλῶς] φέρειν [χρή] ye must bear nobly what heaven bears to you, awards you, S.OC 1693 (lyr., codd., sed secl. καλῶς, χρή) ; εἰ τὸ φερον σε φέρει, φέρε καὶ φέρου AP 10.73
(Pall.).

2 part. φέρων in all genders freq. joined with another Verb:

a to express a subsidiary action, φέρων ἔδωκε he brought and gave, Od.22.146; δὸς τῷ ξείνῳ ταῦτα φέρων take this and give it him, 17.345; ἔγχος ἔστησε φέρων brought the spear and placed it, 1.127; σῖτον παρέθηκε φέρουσα ib. 139, al., cf. S.Tr. 622; τοῦτο ἐλθὼν οἴκαδε φέρων τῷ πατρὶ ἔδωκα Pl.Hp.Ma. 282e
, cf. R. 345b; so ὁ μὲν Ἐπίχαρμον.. εἰς δέκα τόμους φέρων συνήγαγεν Porph.Plot. 24
; ἑκάστῃ ἐννεάδι τὰ οἰκεῖα φέρων συνεφόρησα ibid., etc.; sts. translatable by with, ᾤχοντο φέροντες τὰ γράμματα Th.7.8
.

b intr., in pass. sense, to denote unrestrained action, νῦν σε μάλ' οἴω.. φέροντα.. φιλητεύσειν h.Merc. 159
; φέρουσα ἐνέβαλε νηΐ φιλίῃ she went and rammed, rammed full tilt, Hdt.8.87; ὅταν ἐπὶ θάτερ' ὥσπερ εἰς τρυτάνην ἀργύριον προσενέγκῃς, οἴχεται φέρον down it sinks, D.5.12;
τὰ μὲν ἄλλα μέρη τοῦ πολέμου παρῆκαν, φέροντες δὲ παντὶ τῷ στρατεύματι πρὸς αὐτὸν Ἀκράγαντα προσήρεισαν
hurling themselves, Plb.1.17.8
; εἰς τοῦτο φέρων περιέστησε τὰ πράγματα Aeschin.3.82
; ὑπέβαλεν ἑαυτὸν φέρων Θηβαίοις ib.90, cf. 1.175, 3.143,146; in the foll. passages φέρων accompanies a Verb of throwing, giving, entrusting, or dedicating, and expresses wholehearted action, whether wise or unwise; there is always an accus., freq. of the reflex. Pron., governed by the principal Verb (or perh. by φέρων): ἐπεὶ ἐς τοὺς κρατῆρας ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἐνέβαλον (sc. ὁ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς ) when I went (or took) and threw myself.., Luc.Icar.13, cf. Fug.1, Plu.Comp.Arist. Cat.1, Fab.6, Per.12, Paus.1.30.1, Ael.VH8.14, Frr.10,69, Philostr. VA3.4; τὴν κατασκευὴν.. φέρων ἐδωρήσατο τῇ μητρί D.S.31.27
, cf. Ach.Tat.1.7; σεαυτὸν.. φέρων ἀπημπόληκας Luc.Merc.Cond.24
; τί παθόντες.. τοῖς ἀτέκνοις τῶν γερόντων ἐσποιεῖτε φέροντες αὑτούς; Luc. DMort.6.3
, cf. Ind.19, Laps.22; ταύτῃ (sc. τῇ ὀργῇ) φέρων ὑπέθηκεν ἑαυτόν Plu.Them.24
, cf. Per.7; τούτῳ φέροντες ὑποβάλλουσι τοὺς υἱούς Id.2.4b
, cf. Luc.6, Pomp.27, Ael.VH6.1, Max.Tyr.1.2; προσέθετο φέρων ἑαυτὸν ἐκείνῳ Eun.VS p.456
B., cf.pp.461,465 B., Dam. ap. Suid. s.v. Σεβηριανός; ἀλλὰ σοὶ μὲν, ὦ θεῶν πάτερ, ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἀναθήσω Jul.Or.7.231b.

3 ἔκκρισις.. ἐκ μικρῶν φέρουσα διαστημάτων occurring at short intervals, Sor.2.45.

XI φέρειν, φέρεσθαι are freq. added epexegetically to δίδωμι and similar Verbs, δῶκεν.. τρίποδα φέρειν Il.23.513
, cf. 16.665, 17.131; τεύχεα.. δότω φέρεσθαι 11.798
, cf. Od.21.349, E.Tr. 419, 454(troch.).

B [voice] Pass. is used in most of the above senses:—special cases:

I to be borne or carried involuntarily, esp. to be borne along by waves or winds, to be swept away, φέρεσθαι ἀνέμοισι, θυέλλῃ, Od.9.82, 10.54, cf. A.Pers. 276 (lyr.), etc.; πᾶν δ' ἦμαρ φερόμην, of Hephaestus falling from Olympus, Il.1.592; ἧκε φέρεσθαι he sent him flying, 21.120; ἧκα πόδας καὶ χεῖρε φέρεσθαι I let go my hands and feet, let them swing free [in the leap], Od.12.442, cf. 19.468; μέγα φέρεται πὰρ σέθεν, of a word uttered, comes with weight, Pi.P.1.87; βίᾳ φέρεται Pl.Phdr. 254a
; πνεῦμα φερόμενον Id.R. 496d
; τὸ πνεῦμα κατὰ τὰς ἀναπνοὰς εἴσω τε καὶ ἔξω φέρεται Gal.16.520
; ῥεῖν καὶ φέρεσθαι Pl.Cra. 411c
; φ. εἰς τὸν Τάρταρον Id.Phd. 114b
; simply, move, go, ποῖ γᾶς φέρομαι; S.OT 1309
(anap.); οὐκ οἶσθ' ὅποι γῆς οὐδ' ὅποι γνώμης φέρῃ Id.El. 922
, cf. E.Hec. 1076 (anap.), etc.; of the excreta, τὰ φερόμενα.. εἰ μὲν αὐτομάτως φέροιτο Philum.
ap. Aët.9.12; πρὸς κοιλίαν φερομένην Aët.4.19
: metaph., εἰς τὸ λοιδορεῖν φέρῃ E.Andr. 729
; πρὸς τὴν τοῦ κάλλους φύσιν Pl.Phdr. 254b
, cf. X.Mem.2.1.4; ἐπὶ ταὐτὸ φέρονται have the same tendency, Phld.Vit.p.42 J.; ἀπὸ δογμάτων καὶ ἀπὸ θεωρημάτων φ. Vett.Val.238.30
; of veins, to be conveyed, Gal.15.531; also ἡ φερομένη οὐσία (the doctrine of) universal motion, Pl.Tht. 177c; οἱ φερόμενοι θεοί the moving gods, i. e. the stars and planets, Plot.2.3.9.

2 freq. in part. with another Verb of motion, φερόμενοι ἐσέπιπτον ἐς τοὺς Αἰγινήτας they fell into their hands with a rush, at full speed, Hdt.8.91; ἀπὸ.. ἐλπίδος ᾠχόμην φερόμενος Pl.Phd. 98b
; ἧκε φερόμενος εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ φύσιν Aeschin.3.89
.

3 of voluntary and impulsive motion, ἰθὺς φέρεται μένει Il.20.172
; ὁμόσε τινὶ φέρεσθαι come to blows with him, X.Cyn.10.21; δρόμῳ φ. πρός τινα Id.HG4.8.37
; φυγῇ εἰς ἑαυτοὺς φ. Id.Cyr.1.4.23
; ἥξει ἐπ' ἐκεῖνον τὸν λόγον φερόμενος Lycurg.59
; φερόμενος ὑπ' ὀργῆς D.H.Comp.18
.

II metaph., καλῶς, κακῶς φέρεσθαι, of things, schemes, etc., turn out, prosper well or ill, succeed or fail, οὔτ' ἂν.. νόμοι καλῶς φέροιντ' ἄν S.Aj. 1074
; κακῶς φ. τὰ ἑαυτοῦ X.HG3.4.25
; εὖ φέρεται ἡ γεωργία Id.Oec.5.17
; ὀλιγώρως ἔχειν καὶ ἐᾶν ταῦτα φέρεσθαι to neglect things and let them take their course, D.8.67; less freq. of persons, fare well or ill, εὖ φερόμενος ἐν στρατηγίαις being generally successful.., Th.5.16, cf. 15; καλῶς φερόμενος τὸ καθ' ἑαυτόν Id.2.60
; φ. ἐν προτιμήσει παρά τινι D.S.33.5
; χεῖρον φερομένη παρὰ τἀδελφῷ J.AJ16.7.6
; of euphonious writing, σύνθεσις καλῶς φερομένη Phld.Po.5.26
.

2 behave, ὑποκριτικῶς, ἀστάτως, etc., Vett.Val.38.20, 197.8, al.

3 have an opinion, ὅπως ἠνέχθη περὶ τοῦ σφυγμοῦ what his opinion was about.., Marcellin.Puls. 233.

C [voice] Med.: for its chief usages, v. supr. A. VI. 3.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > φέρω
4 κοινός

κοινός, ή, όν, also ός, όν S.Tr. 207 (lyr.):—

A common (opp. ἴδιος), not in Hom. (v. ξυνός) ; ἐκ κοινοῦ shared in common, Hes.Op. 723; ἔσται γὰρ βίος ἐκ κ. Ar.Ec. 610
; of a common altar, Simon.140; τὸ τέμενος εἶναι κ. SIG1044.29
(Halic., iv/iii B.C.); κ. ἔρχεται κῦμ' Ἀΐδα Pi.N.7.30
; τρεῖς.. κ. ὄμμ' ἐκτημέναι, of the Gorgons, A.Pr. 795; κ. ὠφέλημα θνητοῖσιν φανείς, of Prometheus, ib. 613; τὰς γυναῖκας εἶναι κοινάς Pl. R. 457d
: prov., κοινὸν τύχη A.Fr. 389
, cf. Men.Mon. 356; κοινὰ τὰ τῶν φίλων E.Or. 735
(troch.), Pl.Phdr. 279c, Men.9, etc.; κ. Ἑρμῆς 'share the luck', Id.Epit.67, 100; κ. ἀρωγά common aid (i.e. for all), S.Ph. 1145 (lyr.); ἐν δὲ κοινὸς ἀρσένων ἴτω κλαγγά and let the shouts of males rise jointly, Id.Tr. 207 (lyr.); κ. πόλεμον πολεμεῖν X.Hier.2.8
; τὸν ἀέρα τὸν κ. Men.531.8
; κ. τὸν ᾅδην ἔσχον οἱ πάντες βροτοί Id.538.8
; κ. ἀγαθὸν τοῦτ' ἐστί, χρηστὸς εὐτυχῶν Id.791
: c. dat., κ. τινί common to or with another, ὑμῖν φῶς.. καὶ τοῖσδ' ἅπασι κ. A.Ag. 523
; ὁ δαίμων κ. ἦν ἀμφοῖν ἅμα Id.Th. 812
; θάλατταν κ. ἐᾶν τοῖς ἡττημένοις And.3.19
; οἰκία.. κοινοτάτη ἀεὶ τῷ δεομένῳ Id.1.147
; [πολιτεία] τίς κοινοτάτη; Arist.Pol. 1289b14, cf. 1265b29; κοινόν τι χαρᾷ καὶ λύπῃ δάκρυα X.HG7.1.32
; τὸν ἥλιον τὸν κ. ἡμῖν Men.611
: c. gen., πάντων αἰθὴρ κ. φάος εἱλίσσων A.Pr. 1092
(anap.), cf. Pers. 132 (lyr.), Eu. 109, Pi.N.1.32; κ. τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων τε καὶ Ἀθηναίων shared in by both.., Pl.Mx. 241c, etc.: with Preps., τὸ ἐπὶ πᾶσι κ., v. infr. v; κ. κατ' ἀμφοτέρων A.D.Synt.144.19
; οὐ γίγνεταί μοί τι κ. πρός τινα AP11.141
(Lucill.), cf. Iamb.Myst.5.7; μέρος κ. πρός τινα shared with.., CPR22.11 (ii A.D.), etc.; κ. μεταξύ τινων Stud.Pal.1.7
ii 11 (v A.D.).

II in social and political relations, public, general, τὸ κ. ἀγαθόν the common weal, Th.5.90; κ. λόγῳ Id.5.37
, Hdt.1.141; κ. στόλῳ ib. 170; ἀδικήματα D.21.45
; ὁ τῆς πόλεως κ. δήμιος Pl.Lg. 872b
; κοινότατον of public or general interest, ib. 724b, cf. Arist.Rh. 1354b29; of constitutions, popular, free, κοινοτέραν εἶναι τὴν ἐκείνου μοναρχίαν τῆς αὑτῶν δημοκρατίας Isoc.10.36
.

2 τὸ κ. the state, τὸ κ. Σπαρτιητέων Hdt.1.67
: abs., of one's own state, Ar.Ec. 208, etc.; τὸ κ. ὠφελεῖται Antipho 3.2.3
, cf. X.Cyr.2.2.20; τὰς ὠφελείας ἅπασιν εἰς τὸ κ. ἀπεδίδου Isoc.10.36
.

b esp. of leagues or federations, τὸ κ. τῶν Ἰώνων Hdt.5.109
; τῶν συμμάχων Isoc.14.21
; τῶν Βοιωτῶν SIG457.10
(Thespiae, iii B.C.), Plb.20.6.1 (pl.), etc.; ἄνευ τοῦ πάντων κοινοῦ (sc. τῶν Θεσσαλῶν) Th.4.78; also, of private associations, Test.Epict.1.22, SIG 1113 ([place name] Loryma), al.; of guilds or corporations, τὸ κ. τῶν τεκτόνων POxy.53.2
(iv A.D.); of boards of magistrates, τὸ κ. τῶν ἀρχόντων ib.54.12 (iii A.D.).

c the government, public authorities, Th.1.90, 2.12, etc.; τὰ κ. Hdt.3.156
; ἀπαγγεῖλαι ἐπὶ τὰ κ. Th.5.37
; ἀπὸ τοῦ κ. by public authority, Hdt.5.85, 8.135; σὺν τῷ κ. by common consent, Id.9.87.

d the public treasury, χρημάτων μεγάλων ἐν τῷ κ. γενομένων Id.7.144
; ἐν τῷ κ. καὶ ἐν τοῖς ίεροῖς Th.6.6
, cf. 17; χρήματα δοῦναι ἐκ τοῦ κ. Hdt.9.87
; ἔχειν ἐν κοινῷ (without the Art.), Th.1.80, cf. Sch.adloc.

e common right or rights of citizens, τὸ κ. τὸ τῶν πολιτῶν Arist.Pol. 1283b41
.

3 τὰ κ. public affairs: πρὸς τὰ κ. προσελθεῖν, προσιέναι, to enter public life, D. 18.257, Aeschin.1.165; but also, the public money, Ar.Pl. 569, D.8.23 (in full, τὰ κ. χρήματα X.HG6.5.34
, Arist.Pol. 1271b11); τὰ κ. τῆς πόλεως, opp. τὰ ἁγνά, BMus.Inscr.4.481*.383; ἀπὸ κοινοῦ at the public expense, X.An.4.7.27, 5.1.12; ἐκ κοινοῦ φαγεῖν Euphro 8.4
, cf. Antiph. 230; ἐκ κ. from common funds, at joint expense, PGrenf.1.21.19 (ii B.C.).

III common, ordinary, τὰ κ. εἰδέναι Pl.Ax. 366b
; διὰ τῶν κ. ποιεῖσθαι τὰς πίστεις Arist.Rh. 1355a27
; κοινοτάτη τῶν αἰσθήσεων [ἡ ἁφή] Id.EN 1118b1; τὰ κ. commonplaces, Men.Sam.27, Epit. 309; so κ. τόπος Hermog.Prog.6
, Aphth.Prog.7; ἡ κ. ἔννοια or ἐπίνοια, Plb. 2.62.2, 6.5.2; κ. νοῦς, φρένες, common sense, Phld.Rh.1.37 S., 202 S.; κ. καὶ διήκουσαι κακίαι general and all-pervading vices, Id.Sign.28; κ. καὶ δημώδη ὀνόματα Longin.40.2
; κ. καὶ ἐν μέσῳ κείμενα ὀνόματα D.H.Lys.3
; ἡ κ. διάλεκτος every-day language (free from archaisms and far-fetched expressions), Id.Isoc.2; πεφευγὼς τὸ κ. Phld.Acad. Ind.p.53
M.

2 Gramm., ordinary, 'regular' Greek, opp. special dialects, διάλεκτοί εἰσι πέντε, Ἀτθὶς Δωρὶς Αἰολὶς Ἰὰς καὶ κ. Sch.D.T. p.14 H., cf. D.S.1.16, Theodos.Can.p.37 H., etc.; ἡ κ. alone, A.D. Conj.223.24; τὸ κ. ἔθος, ἡ κ. ἐκφορά, Id.Adv.155.10, Pron.4.27; οἱ κ. the writers who use this language, Sch.D.T.p.469 H., EM405.23.

b colloquial, vulgar Greek, Moer.pp.201 ([comp] Comp., prob. for καιν-), 243 P., al.

c ἡ κ. διάλεκτος demotic Egyptian, Manethoap. J.Ap.1.14.

3 common, of inferior quality, χρυσός POxy.905.5
(ii A.D.), 1273.6 (iii A.D.).

4 in magical formulae, of words added at will by the user, ' and so forth', freq.in Pap., PMag.Osl.1.255, PMag.Par.1.273, al.; κοινὰ ὅσα θέλεις ib.2.53; ὁ κ. λόγος PMag.Lond.46.435
; cf. κοινολογία.

IV of Persons, connected by common origin or kindred, esp.of brothers and sisters, κ. σπέρμα Pi.O.7.92
, cf.S.OT 261, OC 535 (lyr.); κ. αἷμα Id.Ant. 202
, cf. 1; κ. πατήρ, μήτηρ, PAmh.2.152.9(v/vi A.D.), PFlor.47.11 (iii A.D.); also κ. Χάριτες Pi.O.2.50
.

2 one who shares in a thing, partner, ἐν θύμασιν κ. ποεῖσθαί τινα S.OT 240
; κ. ἐν κοινοῖσι λυπεῖσθαι Id.Aj. 267
, cf. Ar.V. 917; also κ. τῷ θεῷ belonging in part to the god (who claims tithe of his substance), Berl.Sitzb.1927.161 ([place name] Cyrene).

3 lending a ready ear to all, impartial, μὴ οὐ κ. ἀποβῆτε Th.3.53
; neutral, ib.68; κοινοὺς τῷ τε διώκοντι καὶ τῷ φεύγοντι Lys.15.1
; μέτριος καὶ κ. Arist.Ath.6.3
; κοινοί, οἱ, arbitrators, GDI1832.10 (Delph.); κ. μεσίτης PStrassb.41.14
(iii A.D.); of a capital city, δεῖ.. κοινὴν εἶναι τῶν τόπων ἁπάντων easily accessible on all sides, Arist.Pol. 1327a6.

b courteous, affable, X. Cyn.13.9; κ. ἅπασι γενέσθαι Isoc.5.80
; τῇ πρὸς πάντας φιλανθρωπίᾳ κ. Democh.2
J.; ἔχειν τὰς κ. φρένας Phld.Rh.1.202
S.

c in bad sense, κοινή, ἡ, prostitute, Vett.Val.119.30, Porph.Hist.Phil.12 (pl.).

d of events, κοινότεραι τύχαι more impartial, i.e. more equal, chances, Th.5.102; ἔστιν ἐν τῷ κ. πᾶσι c. inf., And.2.6.

V in Logic, general, universal, τὸ κ. λαμβάνειν περί τινων, τὸ ἐπὶ πᾶσι κ., Pl.Tht. 185b, 185c; τὰ κ. λεγόμενα ἀξιώματα Arist.APo. 76b14
; αἱ κ. ἀρχαί ib. 88a36; κ. ἔννοιαι axioms, heading in Euc.; general, κ. ὅρος Arist.Metaph. 987b6
; κοινὰ καὶ στοιχειώδη general principles, Phld.Rh.1.69S.; κ. σημεῖον, opp. ἴδιον, Id.Sign.14; κ. κρίσις objectively valid judgement, Id.Po.5.22; ὄνομα κ. Str.10.2.10
; abstract, ὁ κ. ἄνθρωπος καὶ λογισμῷ ληπτός Dam.Pr. 341
.

VI Gramm.,

1 κ. συλλαβή common syllable, capable of being long or short, D.T.633.17, Heph. 1.4.

b κ. ποιήματα, poems which are both κατὰ στίχον and συστηματικά, e.g. the Sapphic stanza, Id.pp.58,59 C.; also, poems of ambiguous metrical form, Id.p.60 C.

2 v.supr.111.2.

3 of gender, κ. γένος D.T.634.19
; of nouns, A.D.Pron.30.7, al., EM143.33, 305.19, etc.

4 ἀπὸ κοινοῦ λαμβάνειν, of two clauses taking a word in common, A.D.Synt.122.14, al.; κοινὸν or ἐκ κοινοῦ παραλαμβάνεσθαι, ib.20, 28, al.

VII of forbidden meats, common, profane, φαγεῖν κ. καὶ ἀκάθαρτον Act.Ap.10.14
, cf. Ep.Rom.14.14; κ. χερσὶ ἐσθίειν Ev.Marc.7.2
.

VIII κοινόν, τό, name of an eye-salve, CIL 13.10021.3, al.

B Adv. κοινῶς in common, jointly, E. Ion 1462; τὰ κοινὰ κ. δεῖ φέρειν συμπτώματα Men.817
: [comp] Comp., ἐν Κρήτῃ -οτέρως [ἔχει τὰ τῶν συσσιτίων] Arist.Pol. 1272a16.

2 publicly, κ. μᾶλλον ὠφέλησαν ἢ ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων ἔβλαψαν Th.2.42
, etc.

3 sociably, like other citizens, οὐδὲ κ. οὐδὲ πολιτικῶς ἐβίωσαν Isoc.4.151
; ἴσως καὶ κ. πρός τινα προσφέρεσθαι Arist.Rh.Al. 1430a1
; κ. καὶ φιλικῶς Plu.Ant.33
; μετρίως καὶ κ. ὰσπάζεσθαι Id.Arat.43.

4 in general, Diph.Siph. ap. Ath. 3.81a; ἡ κ. σύνεσις, τὸ κ. ἄνθρωπον", Phld.Vit.p.34J., Mort.38; opp. ἰδίως, Demetr.Lac.Herc.1014.41, Plu.Marc.8, cf. Longin.15.1; κοινότερον εἰπεῖν Phld.Rh.1.256
S.; - οτέρως Orib.Fr.93.

5 in the common dialect, A.D.Pron.82.27, al.: [comp] Comp. - ότερον Id.Synt.159.5.

6 in plain language, opp. σοφιστικῶς, Plu.2.659f; in the ordinary or wide sense, opp. κυρίως, Them.in APo.5.5: [comp] Comp., M.Ant. 2.10.

II fem. dat. [full] κοινῇ; [dialect] Dor. [full] κοινᾷ SIG56.11 (Argos, v B.C.); [dialect] Boeot. [full] κυνῆ ib.635.31 (Acraeph., ii B.C.):—in common, by common consent, Hdt.1.148, 3.79, S.OT 606, OC 1339, E.Hipp. 731, Th.1.3, etc.; κ. πᾶσι καὶ χωρίς Arist.Pol. 1278b23
, cf. Ath.40.3; κ. μετά τινος, κ. σύν τινι, Pl.Smp. 209c, SIG346.27 (iv B.C.), X.Mem.1.6.14, etc.; ἰδίᾳ τε καὶ κ. Alex.291
: also neut.pl.
κοινά S.Ant. 546
.

2 publicly, καὶ κ. καὶ ἰδίᾳ X.HG1.2.10
, Mem.2.1.12, etc.

3 as Prep. c. dat., together with, E. Ion 1228, Hel. 829, Fr. 823.

III with Preps., εἰς κοινόν in common, in public, ὑμῖν τῇδέ τ' ἐς κ. φράσω A.Pr. 844
; πᾶσιν ἐς κ. λέγω Id.Eu. 408
, cf.Ar.Av. 457 (lyr.), Pl.Lg. 796e; εἰς κ. γνώμην ἀποφαίνεσθαι D.19.156
; εἰς τὸ κ. λέγειν, ἀγορεύειν, Pl.Tht. 165a, X. An.5.6.27; εἰς τὸ κ. for public use, Pl.Lg. 681c.

2 ἀπὸ κοινοῦ, ἐκ κοινοῦ, v.A.1.1, 11.3, VI.4.

3 ἀφεῖσαν ἐν κοινῷ ζητεῖν, Lat. rem in medio reliquerunt, Arist.Metaph. 987b14; but οἱ ἐν κ. γιγνόμενοι λόγοι, = οἱ ἐξωτερικοὶ λόγοι, Id.de An. 407b29.

4 κατὰ κοινόν, opp. κατ' ἰδίαν, jointly, in common, Lexap.D.21.94, Plb.4.3.5; prob. for κατὰ κοινοῦ Id.11.30.3
.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > κοινός
5 τε

τε, enclitic Particle, with two main uses (v. infr. A, B).

A as a Conjunction,

I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second, ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544
; ἀγαθῶν τε κακῶν τε Hes.Op. 669
; δίψῃ τε λιμῷ τε A.Pers. 491
, cf. S.Aj.34,35, Ar.Ach. 370, 375; τήν τε νῆσον τήν τε ἤπειρον Th.4.8
, cf. Antipho 2.3.3, Pl. R. 373b; λυσόμενός τε θύγατρα, φέρων τ' ἀπερείσι' ἄποινα Il.1.13
; παῖδά τε σοὶ ἀγέμεν Φοίβῳ θ' ἱερὴν ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ib. 443; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usu. short in Hom., longer in later Gr., e.g. ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται IG12.103.7
; ἥ τε γὰρ γῆ.. εὔυδρός ἐστι, ποταμοί τε δι' αὐτῆς ῥέουσι Hdt.4.47
; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. Th.4.92, cf. Pl.R. 474c, X.Cyr.1.4.25, Is.1.50; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ' ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ' ἀδικήσαντες κατ' ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen. Tact.16.8, cf. Gp.2.49.1, 12.3.2-3; τούτου γὰρ γενομένου.. τά τε ἐχφόρια Χρυσέρμῳ δυνήσομαι ἀποδοῦναι, ἐγώ τε ἔσομαι παρὰ σοῦ φιλανθρωπίας τετευχώς PEnteux.60.11
(iii B.C.); κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι Gal.16.494
, cf. 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (qq.v.); τε may be used three or more times, ἔν τ' ἄρα οἱ φῦ χειρί, ἔπος τ' ἔφατ' ἔκ τ' ὀνόμαζεν Od.15.530
, cf. Il.1.177, 2.58, A.Pr. 89sq., B.17.19sq., Lys. 19.17, X.Cyr.3.3.36:— ἑνδεκάτη τε δυωδεκάτη τε prob. means the eleventh or twelfth, Od.2.374, 4.588:—sts. τε.. τε couples alternatives, ἀπόρως εἶχε δοῦναί τε μὴ δοῦναί τε E.IA56
, cf. Heracl. 153, El. 391; hence we find τε.. ἢ.., Pl.Tht. 143c, Ion 535d; on ἢ (or ἦ) .. τε in Il.2.289 and A.Eu. 524 (lyr.) v. ἦ 1.3.

2 the first clause may be negative, the second affirmative, as ἐκκλησίαν τε οὐκ ἐποίει.., τήν τε πόλιν ἐφύλασσε Th.2.22
; but οὔτε.. τε is more freq., as οὔτε ποσίν εἰμι ταχύς.., γιγνώσκω τε X.Cyr.2.3.6
(v. οὔτε 11.4
); we also find οὐ.. τε.. , as οὐχ ἡσύχαζον.., παρεκάλουν τε τοὺς ξυμμάχους Th.1.67
; and μὴ.. τε.. , as ἵνα μή τι διαφύγῃ ἡμᾶς, εἴ τέ τι βούλει κτλ. Pl.Phd. 95e.

3 τε ( both) sts. corresponds to a following δέ ( and), or τε ( and) to a preceding μέν, e.g.

a τε.. δὲ.. , as κόμισαί τέ με, δὸς δέ μοι ἵππους Il.5.359
, cf. 7.418, S.OC 367, Tr. 285, E.Ph. 1625; ἐσθὰς ἀμφότερόν νιν ἔχεν, ἅ τε.. ἐπιχώριος.., ἀμφὶ δὲ παρδαλέᾳ στέγετο Pi.P.4.80
; διήκουέ τε.., ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἐπῄνεσε X.Cyr.4.4.3
; so with ἅμα δὲ καὶ.., ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ.., Th.1.25, Pl.Smp. 186e:—so τε.., ἀτὰρ οὖν καὶ.., Id.Hp.Ma. 295e.

b μὲν.. τε.., ἄνδρα μὲν.., τρεῖς τε κασιγνήτους Il.19.291
-3, cf. Od.22.475-6, Pi.O.6.88, 7.88, A.Th. 924, Ch. 585 (lyr.), S.Ant. 963 (lyr.), E.Heracl. 337 codd., Cyc.41 (lyr.), Ar.Nu. 563(lyr.), Pl.Phdr. 266c, Lg. 927b: v. μέν A. 11.6c.

4 a single τε ( and) joins a word, phrase, or (esp. later) clause or sentence to what precedes, τελευτὴν κεφαλήν τε Pl.Ti. 69a
; θνητὰ ἀθάνατά τε ib.c; Ζεῦ ἄλλοι τε θεοί Il.6.476
; κύνεσσιν οἰωνοῖσί τε πᾶσι 1.5
; ῥίγησέν τ' ἂρ ἔπειτα ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Ἀγαμέμνων v.l. for δ' ἂρ in 11.254; ἕν τε οὐδὲν κατέστη ἴαμα.., σῶμά τε αὔταρκες ὂν οὐδὲν διεφάνη.., Th.2.51; τά τε ἱερὰ.. νεκρῶν πλέα ἦν.. ib.52; νόμοι τε πάντες ξυνεταράχθησαν ibid.; δάκνει σ' ἀδελφὸς ὅ τε θανὼν ἴσως πατήρ E.El. 242
, cf. 253, 262, al.; εἴς τε τὰς ἄλλας.. ἀθροίζεσθαι Aen.Tact.3.5
; τῶν τε ἀρχόντων.. ib.6, cf. 10.8, al.; ὅ τε γραφεὶς κύκλος.. Archim.Spir.11
Def.7; πρός τε τούτοις φησὶν.. PEnteux.63.18
(iii B.C.); χωρίς τε τούτων Plb.2.56.13
, 61.1, 3.17.7; ταῦτά τ' ἐγίνετο.. Id.2.43.6
, cf. 3.70.4; ἀπαιτούμενός τε ὑπ' ἐμοῦ τὰ ἔρια οὐκ ἀποδίδωσί PEnteux.2.6
, cf. 8.4, al. (iii B.C.); γράψαι Ἀγαθοκλεῖ τῷ ἐπιστάτῃ διασαφῆσαί τε αὐτῷ ib.81.21 (iii B.C.); καθόλου τε.. Arr.Epict.1.19.13
, cf. 2.2.17; ἀταράχους τήν τε δύναμιν ἀκαθαιρέτους Sor.1.21
, cf. 24, al.; ὄξει βαφικῷ στυπτηρίᾳ τε PHolm. 1.4
, cf. Gem.16.6; χρὴ.. λαχάνων ἅπτεσθαι, κοιλίαν τε λύειν Gp.1.12.19
, cf. 2.2.2, al.; this τε may be used any number of times, Od.4.149- 150, 14.75, 158-9, Men.Pk.15,16,20, Hipparch.1.9.8, Act.Ap.2.43,46, 4.13, 14, al.

II τε.. καὶ.. , or τε καὶ.. , both.. and.., where τε points forward to καί, and usu. need not be translated, e.g. Ἀτρείδης τε ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν καὶ δῖος Ἀχιλλεύς Il.1.7
; εἰ δὴ ὁμοῦ πόλεμός τε δαμᾷ καὶ λοιμὸς Ἀχαιούς ib.61; δειλός τε καὶ οὐτιδανὸς καλεοίμην ib. 293; ζωόν τε καὶ ἀρτεμέα 7.308
, cf. 327, 338, al.; τῆς τε γῆς ἐούσης ἐπιτηδέης καὶ τῶν ποταμῶν ἐόντων σφι συμμάχων Hdt.4.47
; βούλεταί τε καὶ ἐπίσταται Th.2.35
; ὁ φύς τε καὶ τραφείς Pl.R. 396c
; βάσιν τε γὰρ πάλιν τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχουσι τὴν ΖΒ καὶ.. Euc.1.47
; sts. the elements joined by τε.. καὶ.. are joined in order to be compared or contrasted rather than simply joined, κάκιστος νῦν τε καὶ πάλαι δοκεῖ S.Ant. 181
; μεσαμβρίη τέ ἐστι καὶ τὸ κάρτα γίνεται ψυχρόν Hdt.4.181
; ἔτυχόν τε ὕσταται ἐξαναχθεῖσαι καί κως κατεῖδον Id.7.194
; ἐπαύσατό τε ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ τὸ κῦμα ἔστρωτο ib. 193; ταὐτὰ.. νῦν τε καὶ τότε Ar.Av. 24
; χωρὶς τό τ' εἰπεῖν πολλὰ καὶ τὰ καίρια S.OC 808
; ὅσον τό τ' ἄρχειν καὶ τὸ δουλεύειν δίχα A.Pr. 927
; sts. (like τε.. τε) even used of alternatives, διάνδιχα μερμήριξεν, ἵππους τε στρέψαι καὶ ἐναντίβιον μαχέσασθαι Il.8.168
; ἐν δίκᾳ τε καὶ παρὰ δίκαν Pi.O.2.16
; θεοῦ τε.. θέλοντος καὶ μὴ θέλοντος A.Th. 427
; πείσας τε.. καὶ μὴ τυχών Th.3.42
:—on οἵ τε ἄλλοι καὶ.. , e.g. τοῖς τε ἄλλοις ἅπασι καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις Isoc.12.249
, and ἄλλως τε καὶ.. , v. ἄλλος 11.6, ἄλλως 1.3
.

2 in this sense τ' ἠδέ is only [dialect] Ep., σκῆπτρόν τ' ἠδὲ θέμιστας Il.9.99
, cf. 1.400, al.; also τε.., ἰδέ, χαλκόν τε ἰδὲ λόφον 6.469
, cf. 8.162.

3 καὶ.. τε, both.. and.., is occasionally found, as καὶ μητέρα πατέρα τ' E.Alc. 646.

b καὶ.. τε perh. means and.. also in καὶ ναυτικῷ τε ἅμα Th.1.9
; καὶ πρός τε τοὺς Ῥηγίνους Id.6.44
; καὶ αὐτός τε Id.8.68
; v. infr. c. 10.

4 τε.. τε or τε.. καὶ.. sts. join elements which are not syntactically parallel, esp. a part. and a finite verb, ἰοῖσίν τε τιτυσκόμενοι λάεσσί τ' ἔβαλλον (for βάλλοντες) Il.3.80; ἄλλα τε ἐπιφραζόμενος καὶ δὴ καὶ ἐπεπόμφεε Hdt.1.85
; ἀλλῳ τε τρόπῳ πειράζοντες καὶ μηχανὴν προσήγαγον Th.4.100
; τῆς τε ὥρας.. ταύτης οὔσης.., καὶ τὸ χωρίον.. χαλεπὸν ἦν Id.7.47
, cf. 4.85, 8.81, 95.

5 the copulative τε becomes rare in later Gr.; it is found about 340 times in LXX, mostly in the Pentateuch and 1-4 Ma., only 3 times in Ps.; in the NT it is found about 150 times in Act.Ap., 20 times in Ep.Hebr., and very rarely in the other books.

B In [dialect] Ep. (more rarely in other dactylic verse, v. infr. 11) τε stands in general or frequentative statements or in statements of what is well known; such statements are freq. made as justifications of a preceding particular statement or of a preceding exhortation to a particular person or persons; the sense of τε thus approaches that of τοι (cf. τοι and τε in Od.2.276-7, and cf. Il.13.115 with 15.203); although associated with numerous particles and other words of particular types (v. infr.) its meaning remains independent of these and applies to the whole sentence in which it stands: αἶψά τε φυλόπιδος πέλεται κόρος ἀνθρώποισιν Il.19.221
; οὐ γάρ τ' αἶψα θεῶν τρέπεται νόος αἰὲν ἐόντων Od.3.147
; θεοὶ δέ τε πάντα ἴσασιν 4.379
, cf. 5.79, 447, 10.306, 17.485, Il.9.497, 16.688, 17.176, 21.264; ξυνὸς Ἐνυάλιος καί τε κτανέοντα κατέκτα 18.309
, cf. Od.11.537, Il.24.526; ἤ τ' ἔβλητ' ἤ τ' ἔβαλ' ἄλλον 11.410
; οὐ μὲν γάρ τε κακὸν βασιλευέμεν Od.1.392
; οἳ φύλλοισιν ἐοικότες ἄλλοτε μέν τε ζαφλεγέες τελέθουσιν.. ἄλλοτε δὲ.. Il.21.464
; ἄλλος γάρ τ' ἄλλοισιν ἀνὴρ ἐπιτέρπεται ἔργοις Od.14.228
, cf. 8.169, 170, 15.400; τοῦ γάρ τε ξεῖνος μιμνήσκεται ἤματα πάντα, ἀνδρὸς ξεινοδόκου, ὅς κεν φιλότητα παράσχῃ ib.54, cf. 17.322; ῥεχθὲν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Il.17.32
; παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Hes.Op. 218
; αἰεὶ γάρ τε νεώτεροι ἀφραδέουσιν Od. 7.294
; δύσζηλοι γάρ τ' εἰμὲν ἐπὶ χθονὶ φῦλ' ἀνθρώπων ib. 307; τοῦ δέ τε πολλοὶ ἐπαυρίσκοντ' ἄνθρωποι, καί τε πολέας ἐσάωσε Il.13.733
-4; τοῦ μὲν γάρ τε κακοῦ τρέπεται χρὼς ἄλλυδις ἄλλῃ, ἐν δέ τέ οἱ κραδίη στέρνοισι πατάσσει.., πάταγος δέ τε γίγνετ' ὀδόντων ib. 279-83; ὀλίγη δέ τ' ἀνάπνευσις πολέμοιο 18.201
; νέῳ δέ τε πάντ' ἐπέοικεν.. κεῖσθαι 22.71
; κατέλεξεν ἅπαντα κήδε' ὅσ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλει, τῶν ἄστυ ἁλώῃ· ἄνδρας μὲν κτείνουσι, πόλιν δέ τε πῦρ ἀμαθύνει, τέκνα δέ τ' ἄλλοι ἄγουσι, βαθυζώνους τε γυναῖκας 9.592
-4, cf. 22.492, 495, 499; νεμεσσῶμαί γε μὲν οὐδέν· καὶ γάρ τίς τ' ἀλλοῖον ὀδύρεται ἄνδρ' ὀλέσασα.. ἢ Ὀδυσῆ' Od.19.265
; σχέτλιε, καὶ μέν τίς τε χερείονι πείθεθ' ἑταίρῳ.., αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ θεός εἰμι 20.45
, cf. 23.118, Il.2.292, 9.632; νῦν δὲ μνησώμεθα δόρπου· καὶ γάρ τ' ἠΰκομος Νιόβη ἐμνήσατο σίτου κτλ. 24.602 (where a general inference is implied); ὃν Βριάρεων καλέουσι θεοί, ἄνδρες δέ τε πάντες Αἰγαίων' 1.403
, cf. 2.814, 5.306, 10.258, 14.290; sts. of repeated action by particular persons, ἄλλοτε μέν τε γόῳ φρένα τέρπομαι Od.4.102
; οὐ μὰ γὰρ Ἀπόλλωνα Διὶ φίλον, ᾧ τε σύ, Κάλχαν, εὐχόμενος.. θεοπροπίας ἀναφαίνεις Il.1.86
; ἡ δὲ.. μ' αἰεὶ.. νεικεῖ, καί τέ μέ φησι μάχῃ Τρώεσσιν ἀρήγειν ib. 521; μήτηρ γάρ τέ μέ φησι θεά, Θέτις ἀργυρόπεζα, διχθαδίας κῆρας φερέμεν θανάτοιο τέλοσδε 9.410
.

2 in exhortations addressed to an individual, a subsidiary sentence or relative clause in which he is reminded of his special or characteristic sphere of activity is marked by τε, e.g. Ἑρμεία, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε φίλτατόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ ἑταιρίσσαι καί τ' ἔκλυες ᾧ κ' ἐθέλῃσθα, βάσκ' ἴθι.. Il.24.334
; Ἀτρεΐδη, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε λαὸς Ἀχαιῶν πείσονται μύθοισι.., νῦν δ' ἀπὸ πυρκαϊῆς σκέδασον.. 23.156
; δεῦρο δὴ ὄρσο, γρηῢ.., ἥ τε γυναικῶν δμῳάων σκοπός ἐσσι.., ἔρχεο Od. 22.395
, cf. Il.17.249.

3 similarly in general and frequentative statements consisting of two clauses (one of which may be a relative clause, freq. containing the subj. or opt.), in which the fulfilment of the condition stated in the subsidiary or subordinate clause is declared to be generally or always followed by the result stated in the principal clause, either or both clauses may contain τε:

a the principal clause alone contains τε, ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ' ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ Il.1.218
; ὃς δ' ἂν ἀμύμων αὐτὸς ἔῃ καὶ ἀμύμονα εἰδῇ, τοῦ μέν τε κλέος εὐρὺ διὰ ξεῖνοι φορέουσι πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους, πολλοί τέ μιν ἐσθλὸν ἔειπον Od.19.333
; εἴ περ γὰρ θυμῷ γε μενοινάᾳ πολεμίζειν, ἀλλά τε λάθρῃ γυῖα βαρύνεται.., βλάβεται δέ τε γούνατ' ἰόντι Il.19.165
-6; ᾧ μέν κ' ἀμμείξας δώῃ Ζεὺς τερπικέραυνος, ἄλλοτε μέν τε κακῷ ὅ γε κύρεται ἄλλοτε δ' ἐσθλῷ 24.530
.

b the subordinate clause alone contains τε, λάζετο δ' ἔγχος.. τῷ δάμνησι στίχας ἀνδρῶν ἡρώων οἷσίν τε κοτέσσεται ὀβριμοπάτρη 5.747
; ῥεῖα δ' ἀρίγνωτος γόνος ἀνέρος ᾧ τε Κρονίων ὄλβον ἐπικλώση Od.4.207
; ἀντί νυ πολλῶν λαῶν ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ὅν τε Ζεὺς κῆρι φιλήσῃ Il.9.117
, cf. 7.298, Od.6.287, 7.74, 8.547, 18.276; with opt., ἀλλὰ πολὺ πρώτιστος.. ἕλεσκον ἀνδρῶν δυσμενέων ὅ τέ μοι εἴξειε πόδεσσι 14.221
: it is prob. that τε has been replaced by κε in the text of Hom. in Il.1.218, 9.510 (cf. 508), and some other passages in which κε seems to be used, exceptionally, in general relative clauses.

c both clauses contain τε, ὃς μέν τ' αἰδέσεται κούρας Διὸς ἆσσον ἰούσας, τὸν δὲ μέγ' ὤνησαν καί τ' ἔκλυον εὐχομένοιο Il.9.508
-9; εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον γε καὶ αὐτῆμαρ καταπέψῃ, ἀλλά τε καὶ μετόπισθεν ἔχει κότον 1.82
-3.

4 in the subordinate clause of a collective sentence, in which the principal clause states something to be true of all those (i.e. each individual) to whom the predicate of the subordinate clause applies, ὑπόσχωμαι.. κτήματα.. πάντα μάλ' ὅσσα τ' Ἀλέξανδρος.. ἠγάγετο Τροίηνδ'.. δωσέμεν Il.22.115
; πάντων ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει τε καὶ ἕρπει 17.447
, cf. Od.18.131, Il.19.105; βάλλειν ἄγρια πάντα τά τε τρέφει οὔρεσιν ὕλη 5.52
, cf. 18.485.

5 in relative clauses (and in parenthetic principal clauses) which indicate what is customary, ἐπεὶ οὐχ ἱερήϊον οὐδὲ βοείην ἀρνύσθην, ἅ τε ποσσὶν ἀέθλια γίγνεται ἀνδρῶν which are the usual prizes.., Il.22.160; ἔργ' ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, τά τε κλείουσιν ἀοιδοί Od.1.338
, cf. 3.435, 4.85, 13.410, 14.226, 17.423, Il.5.332; κύματος ἐξαναδύς, τά τ' ἐρεύγεται ἤπειρόνδε Od.5.438
; μολπή τ' ὀρχηστύς τε, τὰ γάρ τ' ἀναθήματα δαιτός 1.152
: similarly in clauses with οἷά τε (πολλά), κῆτος ἐπισσεύῃ μέγα δαίμων ἐξ ἁλός, οἷά τε πολλὰ τρέφει.. Ἀμφιτρίτη 5.422
; οὐ γάρ σ' οὐδέ.. δαήμονι φωτὶ ἐΐσκω ἄθλων, οἷά τε πολλὰ μετ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλονται 8.160
, cf. 11.364, 14.63, 15.324, 379.

6 in relative clauses indicating what is true of all persons or things denoted by the same word, οὐ γάρ τις νήσων ἱππήλατος οὐδ' εὐλείμων αἵ θ' ἁλὶ κεκλίαται no one of the islands which lie in the sea (as all islands do, i.e. no island at all), Od.4.608; ἡμίονον.. ἥ τ' ἀλγίστη δαμάσασθαι Il.23.655
; ἐσθλὸς ἐὼν γαμβρὸς ἢ πενθερός, οἵ τε μάλιστα κήδιστοι τελέθουσι Od.8.582
; αἰετοῦ οἴματ' ἔχων.. ὅς θ' ἅμα κάρτιστός τε καὶ ὤκιστος πετεηνῶν Il.21.252
, cf. 24.294; οὐδέ μιν εἰσοιχνεῦσι κυνηγέται, οἵ τε καθ' ὕλην ἄλγεα πάσχουσιν Od.9.120
; δικασπόλοι, οἵ τε θέμιστας πρὸς Διὸς εἰρύαται Il.1.238
, cf. Od.5.67, 101, Il.1.279, 19.31, 24.415; οἶνός σε τρώει.., ὅς τε καὶ ἄλλους βλάπτει Od.21.293
, cf. 14.464; πάρφασις, ἥ τ' ἔκλεψε νόον πύκα περ φρονεόντων Il.14.217
; οἰκωφελίη, ἥ τε τρέφει ἀγλαὰ τέκνα Od.14.223
.

7 when the antecedent is a definite group of gods or men, the relative clause with τε indicates an essential characteristic of the antecedent, Ἐρινύες, αἵ θ' ὑπὸ γαῖαν ἀνθρώπους τείνυνται Il.19.259
; Σειρῆνας.., αἵ ῥά τε πάντας ἀνθρώπους θέλγουσιν Od.12.39
; Φαίηκές μ' ἄγαγον ναυσίκλυτοι, οἵ τε καὶ ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους πέμπουσιν 16.227
, cf. 20.187; νυμφάων αἵ τ' ἄλσεα καλὰ νέμονται καὶ πηγὰς ποταμῶν Il.20.8
; Λωτοφάγων, οἵ τ' ἄνθινον εἶδαρ ἔδουσι Od.9.84
: similarly when the antecedent is an individual person (incl. god) or thing, the relative clause with τε indicates one of his or its general or essential characteristics or aspects, οὐ μὰ Ζῆν' ὅς τίς τε θεῶν ὕπατος καὶ ἄριστος Il.23.43
, cf. 2.669, Od.5.4; Ἑρμείαο ἕκητι διακτόρου, ὅς ῥά τε πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἔργοισι χάριν καὶ κῦδος ὀπάζει 15.319
; Λάμπον καὶ Φαέθονθ', οἵ τ' Ἠῶ πῶλοι ἄγουσι 23.246
; Τειρεσίαο μάντιος ἀλαοῦ, τοῦ τε φρένες ἔμπεδοί εἰσι 10.493
; τεύχεα δύνεις ἀνδρὸς ἀριστῆος, τόν τε τρομέουσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.17.203
, cf. 7.112; κεῖται ἀνὴρ ὅν τ' (v.l. ὃν) ἶσον ἐτίομεν Ἕκτορι δίῳ, Αἰνείας 5.467
; the relative clause sts. indicates what is customary, οὐδέ σε λήθω τιμῆς ἧς τέ μ' ἔοικε τετιμῆσθαι μετ' Ἀχαιοῖς 23.649
; ἔνθα δ' ἀνὴρ ἐνίαυε πελώριος, ὅς ῥά τε μῆλα οἶος ποιμαίνεσκε Od.9.187
; τῶν πάντων οὐ τόσσον ὀδύρομαι.. ὡς ἑνός, ὅς τέ μοι ὕπνον ἀπεχθαίρει καὶ ἐδωδὴν μνωομένῳ 4.105
; σῆς ἀλόχου.. ἥ τέ τοι αὔτως ἧσται ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν 13.336
; καὶ κήρυκα Μέδοντα σαώσομεν, ὅς τέ μευ αἰεὶ.. κηδέσκετο 22.357
, cf. 346.

8 τε is used in descriptions of particular places or things when attention is called to their peculiar or characteristic features, or their position, e.g. Λιβύην, ἵνα τ' ἄρνες ἄφαρ κεραοὶ τελέθουσι Od.4.85
; ἔνθα δέ τ' ὄρνιθες τανυσίπτεροι εὐνάζοντο 5.65
, cf. 9.124, 13.99, 100, 107, 109, 244; ἓξ δέ τέ οἱ (sc. Σκύλλῃ) δειραὶ περιμήκεες 12.90
, cf. 93,99, 105; ἐν δέ τε Γοργείη κεφαλή (in Athena's αἰγίς) Il.5.741; χαλεπὸν δέ τ' ὀρύσσειν ἀνδράσι γε θνητοῖσι (sc. μῶλυ) Od. 10.305; δοιαὶ γάρ τε πύλαι ἀμενηνῶν εἰσὶν ὀνείρων 19.562
; sts. τε draws attention to a well-known custom or permanent feature, ἀρξάμενοι τοῦ χώρου, ὅθεν τέ περ οἰνοχοεύει 21.142
; ἦ μένετε Τρῶας σχεδὸν ἐλθέμεν, ἔνθα τε νῆες εἰρύατ' εὔπρυμνοι Il.4.247
, cf. Od. 6.266; ἐν ποταμῷ, ὅθι τ' ἀρδμὸς ἔην πάντεσσι βοτοῖσιν Il.18.521
, cf. Od.14.353.

9 a part of the anatomy is defined by a clause (containing τε) which indicates a feature which universally belongs to it, κατ' ἰσχίον, ἔνθα τε μηρὸς ἰσχίῳ ἐνστρέφεται Il.5.305
, cf. 8.83, 13.547, 16.481, 20.478; similarly a point of time is defined, ὥρῃ ἐν εἰαρινῇ, ὅτε τ' ἤματα μακρὰ πέλονται Od.18.367
.

10 τε is used in relative clauses which define a measurement of a particular thing or action by reference to the measurement (in general) of some thing or action well known in daily life, γεφύρωσεν δὲ κέλευθον μακρὴν ἠδ' εὐρεῖαν, ὅσον τ' ἐπὶ δουρὸς ἐρωὴ γίγνεται Il.15.358
; τοῦ δ' ἤτοι κλέος ἔσται ὅσον τ' ἐπικίδναται ἠώς 7.451
; ὅτε τόσσον ἀπῆν ὅσσον τε γέγωνε βοήσας Od.9.473
, cf. 3.321, al.; more rarely the definition is by reference to the measurement of a particular thing or action, ἤσθιε.. ἕως ὅ τ' ἀοιδὸς ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν ἄειδεν (s.v.l.) 17.358; ἥ τις δὴ τέτληκε τόσα φρεσίν, ὅσσα τ' ἐγώ περ 19.347
.

11 the freq. use of τε B in similes is to be explained under one or other of the foregoing heads, e.g. when reference is made to generally known kinds of things or natural phenomena, to human experience in daily life, or to well-known phenomena of the animal world, Il.2.456, 459, 463, 468, 470, 471, 474, 481, 3.23-5,33, 11.415-7, al.; or when universal characteristics of gods, men, animals, etc., are indicated by relative clauses introduced by ὅς τε, ὅς ῥά τε, etc., 3.61, 151, 198, al.; or by ὥς τε, ἠΰτε, ὥς τίς τε, etc., e.g. 5.136, 17.133, Od.4.535, ὡς εἴ τε 9.314
, 14.254, etc.

II in post-Hom. Gr. this use of τε is more restricted; outside of [dialect] Ep. and other early dactylic verse (Hes.Op.30, 214, 233, al., Xenoph.13.3, Thgn.148, 359, etc.) it is not found except with relatives, and with these it has scarcely any discernible sense, so that ὅς τε in Lyr. and Trag. is for the most part only = ὅς, e.g. (possibly generalizing) Μοῖρ', ἅ τε πατρώϊον τῶνδ' ἔχει τὸν εὔφρονα πότμον Pi.O.2.35
, cf. 14.2, A.Eu. 1024, E.Hec. 445 (lyr.), etc. (v. ὅστε); without generalizing force, Pi.N.9.9, A.Pers. 297, Ch. 615, etc.; Hdt. has τά πέρ τε 1.74
, ὅκως τε 2.108
codd., ὅσον τε (without a verb, as in Od.9.325, al.) 1.126, 2.96, 3.5, al., οἷά τε 1.93
codd. (adverbially 2.175, 5.11): in [dialect] Att. Prose and Com. even these uses disappear and we find only a few phrases, as ἅτε, ὥστε, ἐφ' ᾧτε, οἷός τε; in later Gr. we find exceptionally ἔνθεν τε Hp.Ep.17
; ἀφ' οὗ τε UPZ62.8
(ii B.C.); ἀπ' οὗ τε PCair.Zen.291.3
(iii B.C.); οἵ τε GDI215.23
(Erythrae, ii B.C.); ἥ τ' PMag.Par.1.2962; ὅσον τε ὀκτὼ στάδια Paus.6.26.1
; καὶ ἔστιν ἔπη Μαντικὰ ὁπόσα τε (= which) ἐπελεξάμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς Id.9.31.5
; οἷόν τε καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κύων φωνῆς θεωροῦμεν S.E.M.11.28
.

C in Hom. τε is also (but less freq.) used in conjunction with other particles in contexts (mainly particular statements) such as the following:

1 in assurances, statements on oath, and threats, σχέτλιος, ἦ τ' ἐκέλευον ἀπωσάμενον δήϊον πῦρ ἂψ ἐπὶ νῆας ἴμεν Il.18.13
; ἐξ αὖ νῦν ἔφυγες θάνατον, κύον· ἦ τέ τοι ἄγχι ἦλθε κακόν 11.362
; ἦ τε is similarly used in 11.391, 17.171, 236, Od.24.28, 311, al.; ἦ τ' ἄν in Il.12.69, al.; γάρ τε (s. v.l.) in οὐ γάρ τ' οἶδα 6.367
, cf. Od.10.190; νύ τε in 1.60, 347 (but τ' more prob. = τοι, v. σύ) ; δέ τε in ἀγορῇ δέ τ' ἀμείνονές εἰσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.18.106
; σὲ δέ τ' ἐνθάδε γῦπες ἔδονται 16.836
; μέν τε in σφὼ μέν τε σαώσετε λαὸν Ἀχαιῶν 13.47
, cf. 4.341; εἴ πέρ τε in οὔ τοι ἔτι δηρόν γε φίλης ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης ἔσσεται, οὐδ' εἴ πέρ τε σιδήρεα δέσματ' ἔχῃσιν Od.1.204
, cf. 188, Il.12.223, 245.

2 also in commands, warnings, and admonitions, σίγα, μή τίς τ' ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν τοῦτον ἀκούσῃ μῦθον Il.14.90
, cf. Od.19.486; ὣς ἄγαγ' ὡς μήτ' ἄρ τις ἴδῃ μήτ' ἄρ τε νοήσῃ Il.24.337
; τούσδε τ' (v.l. δ') ἐᾶν 16.96
(nisi leg. τούσδ' ἔτ') ; δὸς δέ τέ μ' ἄνδρα ἑλεῖν 5.118
; μηδέ τ' ἐρώει (nisi leg. μηδ' ἔτ') 2.179, 22.185.

3 also in passionate utterances, in clauses which indicate the cause of the speaker's passion or a circumstance which might have caused others to behave more considerately towards him, ὤ μοι ἐγὼ δειλή.. ἥ τ'.. τὸν μὲν.. θρέψασα.. ἐπιπροέηκα Il.18.55
; σχέτλιοί ἐστε, θεοί, ζηλήμονες ἔξοχον ἄλλων, οἵ τε θεαῖς ἀγάασθε.. ἤν τίς τε.. Od.5.119
, 120, cf. 21.87, Il.15.468, 17.174; ἡμεῖς δ' αὖ μαχόμεσθ', οἵ πέρ τ' ἐπίκουροι ἔνειμεν and we, who ( mark you) are only allies (not γαμβροί and κασίγνητοι), are fighting, 5.477; τρεῖς γάρ τ' ἐκ Κρόνου εἰμὲν ἀδελφεοί for we, let me tell you, are three brothers, sons of Cronos (and Zeus has no prior title to power), 15.187; ποῖόν δε ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος ὀδόντων δεινόν τ' ἀργαλέον τε· νεμεσσῶμαι δέ τ' ἀκούων Od.21.169
; οὐ μήν οἱ τό γε κάλλιον οὐδέ τ' ἄμεινον Il.24.52
.

4 in descriptions of particular events and things where there is no general reference, κνίση μὲν ἀνήνοθεν, ἐν δέ τε φόρμιγξ ἠπύει Od.17.270
; ὥς (= so) τέ μοι ὑβρίζοντες ὑπερφιάλως δοκέουσιν δαίνυσθαι κατὰ δῶμα 1.227
; τοὺς μέν τ' ἰητροὶ πολυφάρμακοι ἀμφιπένονται.. σὺ δ' ἀμήχανος ἔπλευ, Ἀχιλλεῦ Il.16.28
; πόλιν πέρι δινηθήτην καρπαλίμοισι πόδεσσι, θεοὶ δέ τε πάντες ὁρῶντο dub. l. in 22.166; εὗρε δ' ἐνὶ σπῆϊ γλαφυρῷ Θέτιν, ἀμφὶ δέ τ' ἄλλαι εἵαθ' ὁμηγερέες ἅλιαι θεαί 24.83
(s.v.l.); ἐν δέ τε φάρμακον ἧκε Od.10.317
; νῶϊ δέ τ' ἄψορροι κίομεν Il.21.456
; πολλὰς γὰρ δὴ νύκτας.. ἄεσα καί τ' ἀνέμεινα.. Ἠῶ Od.19.342
; δέελον δ' ἐπὶ σῆμά τ' ἔθηκε Il.10.466
; ἐν δέ τε οἶνον κρητῆρσιν κερόωντο Od.20.252
; so with οὐδέ τ' (nisi leg. οὐδ' ἔτ') , τὸν καὶ ὑπέδδεισαν μάκαρες θεοὶ οὐδέ τ' ἔδησαν Il.1.406
; οὐδέ τ' ἔληγε μέγας θεός, ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτόν 21.248
; οὐδέ τ' ἄειρε 23.730
; οὐδέ τ' ἔασεν 11.437
, 21.596, cf. 15.709.

5 ὅτε τε ( when) freq. introduces a temporal clause defining a point of time in the past by means of a well-known event which occurred then, ἦ οὐ μέμνῃ ὅτε τ' ἐκρέμω ὑψόθεν; Il.15.18; ὅτε τε Κρόνον.. Ζεὺς γαίης νέρθε καθεῖσε 14.203
; ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τ' ἦλθον Ἀμαζόνες 3.189
(but ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τε is general in 13.335; so also ὅτε πέρ τε.. κέρωνται in 4.259); ὅτε τ' ἤλυθε νόσφιν Ἀχαιῶν ἄγγελος ἐς Θήβας 5.803
, cf. 10.286, 22.102, Od.7.323, 18.257.

6 in ὅ τε ( that or because) the τε has no observable meaning, χωόμενος ὅ τ' ἄριστον Ἀχαιῶν οὐδὲν ἔτισας Il.1.244
, cf. 412, 4.32, 6.126, Od.5.357, al.

7 ἐπεί τε = ἐπεί ( when) is rare in Hom., ἐπεί τ' ἐνόησε Il.12.393
, cf. ἐπείτε.

8 where τ' ἄρ occurs in questions, e.g. πῇ τ' ἂρ μέμονας καταδῦναι ὅμιλον; Il.13.307, cf. 1.8, 18.188, al., ταρ (q.v.) should prob. be read, since ἄρ ([etym.] α) usu. precedes a τε which is not copulative; so perh. ταρα should be read for τ' ἄρα in Od.1.346.

9 in ἣ θέμις ἐστὶν.. ἤ τ' ἀνδρῶν ἤ τε γυναικῶν Il.9.276
, it is not clear whether τε is copulative (τε A) or generalizing (τε B) or neither (τε C); ἤ is prob. = ἦ (accented as in ἤτοι (; ἤ τ' ἀλκῆς ἤ τε φόβοιο is dub. l. in 17.42; ἤ τ' = or is found in 19.148, = than in Od.16.216.

10 Rarer and later uses;

a also, esp. with ἄλλος, Ἑρμεία, σὺ γὰρ αὖτε τά τ' ἄλλα περ ἄγγελός ἐσσι Od.5.29
, cf. 17.273, Il.23.483; ἐπεὶ τά τε ἄλλα πράττουσιν καλῶς, ἀναθεῖναι αὐτοὺς καὶ στήλην IG22.1298.9
, cf. Lycurg.100 (s.v.l.); ἐκομισάμην τὸ παρὰ σοῦ ἐπιστόλιον, ἐν ᾧ ὑπέγραψάς μοι τήν τε παρὰ Ζήνωνος πρὸς Ἰεδδοῦν γεγραμμένην PCair.Zen.18.1
(iii B.C.); εἰ οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐπιστροφὴν μὴ ποιήσει, οἵ τε λοιποί μοι τὰς χεῖρας προσοίσουσιν (- σωσιν Pap.) PPetr.2p.10 (iii B.C.); τῶν δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιησόντων τά τε κτήνη ὑπὸ στέρεσιν ἀχθήσεσθαι πρὸς τὰ ἐκφόρια PTeb.27.74
(ii B.C.); v. supr. A. 11.3b.

b with ὅδε, adding a slight emphasis to the preceding word, εἰ δὴ τήνδε τε γαῖαν ἀνείρεαι Od.13.238
, cf. 15.484.

c τε γάρ rarely = καὶ γάρ or γάρ, Arist.APo. 75b41, de An. 405a4, PA 661b28, Pol. 1318b33, 1333a2; ἐάν τε γάρ for even if, 2 Ep.Cor.10.8; τήν τε γὰρ ἐπιθυμίαν οὐκ ᾔδειν for I had not known even lust. Ep.Rom.7.7.

D Position of τε:

1 in signf. A, as an enclitic, it stands second word in the sentence, clause, or phrase, regardless of the meaning: ἐγγύθι τε Πριάμοιο καὶ Ἕκτορος near both Priam and Hector, Il.6.317; ἡμέτεραί τ' ἄλοχοι καὶ νήπια τέκνα 2.136
, cf. 4.505, 7.295; αἰεί τε δὴ νηλὴς οὺ καὶ θράσους πλέως A.Pr.42
codd., cf. 291 (anap.); ἄνευ τε δόλου καὶ ἀπάτης Hdt.1.69
; ὑπέρ τε σοῦ καὶ τῆς ἀδελφῆς PEnteux.6.6
(iii B.C.); τοῖς τε πόνοις καὶ μαθήμασι Pl.R. 537a
, cf. Ti. 70b; hence in E.Or. 897 πόλεος must be taken with what precedes (Porson ad loc.): but article + noun, preposition + noun are freq. regarded as forming a unity indivisible by τε, τοῖς κτανοῦσί τε A.Ch.41
(lyr.); πρὸς βίαν τε Id.Pr. 210
; also the order is freq. determined by the meaning, τε being placed immediately after the word (or first word of a phrase or clause) which it joins to what precedes or to what follows, πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544
; ἔξω δόμων τε καὶ πάτρας A.Pr. 665
; the copulative or preparatory τε precedes many other particles, e.g. τε γάρ, τ' ἄρα, τέ τις.

2 τε is enclitic in signfs. B, C also, and stands early in its sentence, clause, or phrase (v. supr.), but many particles which follow τε in signf. A precede it in signfs. B, C, e.g. in signfs. B, C we have δέ τε, μέν τε, γάρ τε, ἀλλά τε, δ' ἄρα τε, ὅς ῥά τε, οὔτ' ἄρ τε, καὶ γάρ τίς τε, ὅς τίς τε, καί τε.

E Etymology: signf. A is found also in Skt. ca, Lat. - que; for signfs. B and c cf. Skt. ca in yá[hudot ] káś ca 'whosoever (with following verb)', Lat. - que in quisque, ubique, plerique, usque, neque, nec (= non in necopinans, etc.), Goth. ni-h 'not' (also 'and not'), Lat. namque (= nam).

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τε
6 ὁ

ὁ, [full] ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

A demonstr. Pronoun.

B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.

C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dual τοῖιν Od.18.34
, al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ; οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404
(anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ; τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11
; τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18
; τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e
; τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e
; τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75
(τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484, ταῖν Lys.19.17
, Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem., μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν Schwyzer664.8
(Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With ὁ, ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)

A ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):

I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun, αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105
; τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186
, cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.

II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12
, al.

III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ; θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43
, cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.

IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.

V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.

VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter,
ὁ δέ
the former, Pl.Prt. 359e
, Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595
; τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d
, etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28
, cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ; πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c
; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg., ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6
: sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν or ὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317
-19, cf. 116 ; τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102
, cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.

2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ S.OC24
; τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b
; οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a
, etc.

3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41
; νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c
, cf. Phlb. 13c.

4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.

5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3
, cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. by ἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304
; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ; τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843
, etc. ; ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205
(v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ; σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45
, cf. μέν D.
III ; γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d
, cf. Tht. 181d.

6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491
; τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3
, cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87
; ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6
: this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.

7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.

8 the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ' ὁ.. οὔθ' ὁ Il.15.417
; ἢ τοῖσιν ἢ τοῖς A.Supp. 439
; οὔτε τοῖς οὔτε τοῖς Pl.Lg. 701e
.

VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,

1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v. ὅς A.
II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc., καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a
, cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt., καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61
, al.

2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b
: but mostly in acc., καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23
, cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ; τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141
, cf. 9.68 ; τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243
; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ' ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν Thgn.398
, cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.; τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53
; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.

VIII abs. usages of single cases,

1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12
.

b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ; τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46
; δελφῖνες τῇ καὶ τῇ ἐθύνεον ἰχθυάοντες Hes.Sc. 210
:—only poet.

c of Manner,
τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν
in this way, thus, Od.8.510
.

d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: without μέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48
.

e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.

2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose, τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d
, Sph. 230b.

b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.

3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6), τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37
; τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89
; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.

4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; also τὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14
; τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14
; τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90
: sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107
,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.

5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.

b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.; ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32
, cf. A.Eu. 462 ; τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59
.

c in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (lit. before this [day]), and to-day's, IG9(2).517.43 (Larissa, iii B.C.).

6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs., ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90
, Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.; ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71
; τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα μελάγγειον οὖσαν Plu.2.364c
: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47
codd.; with πάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19
, cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).

B ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst.,
αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον
the hindmost man, Il.11.178
; τὸν ἄριστον 17.80
; τὸν δύστηνον 22.59
; τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325
; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also in τῶν ἄλλων 2.674
, al.: with Advs., τὸ πρίν 24.543
, al.; τὸ πάρος περ 17.720
; τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583
; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ; τὰ πρῶτα 1.6
,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ; ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559
.—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.

I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron., τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5
; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12; οὐχ ὑπὲρ τὴν οὐσίαν ποιούμενοι τοὺς παῖδας Pl.R. 372b
.

b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of ὁ with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).

c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.

d for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc., v. καί B.2.

2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109
; πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242
, etc.

b freq. with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45
, etc.

3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.

4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.

5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.; τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148
; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.

6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ; τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b
; ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d
, cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ; ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8
; τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8
: hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.

7 before Prons.,

a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc., τὸν ἐμέ Pl.Tht. 166a
,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ; τὸν αὑτόν Id.Phdr. 258a
; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.

b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.

c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst.,
ὁ τοιοῦτος
that sort of person, X.Mem.4.2.21
, etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art., τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13
.

8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6, πολύς 11.3
, etc.

9 the Art. with the [comp] Comp. is rare, if ἤ follows, S.Ant. 313, OC 796.

II elliptic expressions:

1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.

2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers., τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48
. But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86
; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.

3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.

4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.

5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as ὁ, ἡ, τὸ νῦν; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52
; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266
, cf.[315] (lyr.); ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412
(lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ; τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731
.

C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262
, cf. 1.300, al. ; Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526
(lyr.); Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86
; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3
, cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag., τῆς S.OC 1258
, Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.); τῷ S.Ph.14
; τήν Id.OC 747
, Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg. τεῦ Il.18.192
(s.v.l.).

D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:

a [dialect] Att. ὁ, ἡ, τό, with [pron. full] ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ.

b other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g., [dialect] Dor. ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ Theoc.1.65
, ὥλαφος from ὁ ἔλαφος ib. 135 ; [dialect] Ion. ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς- SIG57.45 (Milet., v B.C.) ; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή Heraclit.60
, etc.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁ
7 οὐ

οὐ, the negative of

A fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compds. of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, v. infr. G.

A USAGE.

I as the negative of single words,

II as the negative of the sentence.

I οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compd. with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, Il.24.296; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, 2.132, 4.55, al.; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, 1.112, 3.289, al.; οὔ φημι deny, 7.393, 23.668, al. (In most of these uses μή can replace οὐ when the constr. requires it, e.g. εἰ μή φησι ταῦτα ἀληθῆ εἶναι Lycurg.34
; but sts. οὐ is retained, εἰ δ' ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν Il.3.289
; εἰ δέ κ'.. ου'κ εἰῶσι 20.139
; ἐὰν οὐ φάσκῃ Lys.13.76
; ἐάντε.. οὐ (v.l. μή) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε Pl. Ap. 25b
):—with Participles: οὐκ ἐθέλων Il.4.224
, 300, 6.165, etc.:— with Adjectives: οὐκ ἀέκοντε 5.366
, 768, al.; οὐ πολλήν Th.6.7
, etc.:— with Adverbs: οὐχ ἥκιστα Id.1.68
, etc.: rarely with Verbal Nouns (v. infr. 11.10).—On the use of οὐ in contrasts, v. infr. B.

II as negativing the whole sentence,

1 οὐ is freq. used alone, sts. with the ellipsis of a definite Verb, οὔκ (sc. ἀποκερῇ) , ἄν γε ἐμοὶ πείθῃ Pl.Phd. 89b
: sts. as negativing the preceding sentence, Ar. Pax 850, X.HG1.7.19: as a Particle of solemn denial freq. with μά (q. v.) and the acc.; sts. without μά, οὐ τὸν πάντων θεῶν θεὸν πρόμον Ἅλιον S. OT 660
(lyr.), cf. 1088 (lyr.), El. 1063 (lyr.), Ant. 758.

2 with ind. of statement, τὴν δ' ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω Il.1.29
, cf. 114, 495; οὐ φθίνει Κροίσου φιλόφρων ἀρετά Pi.P.1.94
; ἔνθα κεν οὔ τιν' ἀδάκρυτόν γ' ἐνόησας Ἀργείων Od.24.61
; οὔ κεν.. ἔπαξε Pi.N.7.25
; οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε Il.8.369
.

3 with subj. in [tense] fut. sense, only in [dialect] Ep., οὐ γάρ τίς με βίῃ γε ἑκὼν ἀέκοντα δίηται 7.197
; οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίς μῃ κίθαρις 3.54
, cf. 11.387.

4 with opt. in potential sense (without ἄν or κεν), also [dialect] Ep., ὃ οὐ δύο γ' ἄνδρε φέροιεν 5.303
, 20.286.

5 with opt. and ἄν, κείνοισι δ' ἂν οὔ τις.. μαχέοιτο 1.271
, cf. 301, 2.250, Hdt. 6.63, A.Pr. 979, S.Aj. 155 (anap.), E.IA 310, Ar.Ach. 403, etc.

6 in dependent clauses οὐ is used,

a with ὅτι or ὡς, after Verbs of saying, knowing, and showing, ἐκ μέν τοι ἐρέω.. ὡς ἐγὼ οὔ τι ἑκὼν κατερύκομαι Od.4.377
, cf. S.El. 561, D.2.8, etc.: so with ind. or opt. and ἄν, ἀπελογοῦντο ὡς οὐκ ἄν ποτε οὕτω μωροὶ ἦσαν X.HG5.4.22
, cf. Pl.R. 330a; ὡς δὲ οὐκ ἂν δικαίως αὐτοὺς δέχοισθε μαθεῖν χρή Th.1.40
, cf. X.Cyr.1.1.3, etc.: with opt. representing ind. in orat. obliq., ἔλεξε παιδὶ σῷ.. ὡς.. Ἕλληνες οὐ μενοῖεν A.Pers. 358
, cf. S.Ph. 346, Th.1.38, X.HG6.1.1, Pl.Ap. 22b, etc.: for μή in such sentences, v. μή B. 3.

b in all causal sentences, and in temporal and Relat. sentences unless there is conditional or final meaning, χωσαμένη, ὅ οἱ οὔ τι θαλύσια.. ῥέξε Il.9.534
; ἄχθεται ὅτι οὐ κάρτα θεραπεύεται Hdt.3.80
; διότι οὐκ ἦσαν δίκαι, οὐ δυνατοὶ ἦμεν παρ' αὐτῶν ἃ ὤφειλον πράξασθαι Lys.17.3
; μή με κτεῖν', ἐπεὶ οὐχ ὁμογάστριος Ἕκτορός εἰμι Il.21.95
, etc.; νῦν δὲ ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἐθέλεις.., εἶμι Pl.Prt. 335c
; ἐπειδὴ τὸ χωρίον οὐχ ἡλίσκετο Th.1.102
; νηπιάχοις οἷς οὔ τι μέλει πολεμήϊα ἔργα Il.2.338
, etc.: in causal relative sentences, οἵτινές σε οὐχὶ ἐσώσαμεν Pl.Cri. 46a
; esp. in the combinations, οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις οὐ .., as οὐκ ἔστ' ἐραστὴς ὅστις οὐκ ἀεὶ φιλεῖ E.Tr. 1051
, cf. Hec. 298; οὔτις ἔσθ' ὃς οὔ S.Aj. 725
; οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅστις οὐ .. Isoc. 15.180.

c after ὥστε with ind. or opt. with ἄν, ὥστ' οὐ δυνατόν σ' εἵργειν ἔσται Ar.V. 384
, cf. S.Aj.98, OT 411; οὕτως αὐτοὺς ἀγαπῶμεν.. ὥστε.. οὐκ ἂν ἐθελήσαιμεν Isoc.8.45
; οὐκ ἂν ὡρκίζομεν αὐτὸν ὥστε τῆς εἰρήνης ἂν διημαρτήκει καὶ οὐκ ἂν ἀμφότερ' εἶχε D.18.30
: ὥστε οὐ with inf. is almost invariably due to orat. obliq., ὥστ' οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθαι (for οὐκ αἰσχύνονται) Id.19.308, cf. Th.5.40, 8.76, Lys.18.6, Is.11.27 (cj. Reiske).—Rarely not in orat. obliq., S.El. 780, E. Ph. 1358, Hel. 108, D.53.2,9.48.

7 in a conditional clause μή is necessary, except,

a in Hom., when the εἰ clause precedes the apodosis and the verb is indic., εἰ δέ μοι οὐκ ἐπέεσσ' ἐπιπείσεται Il. 15.162
, cf. 178, 20.129, 24.296, Od.2.274, Il.4.160, Od.12.382, 13.144 (9.410 is an exception).

b when the εἰ clause is really causal, as after Verbs expressing surprise or emotion, μὴ θαυμάσῃς, εἰ πολλὰ τῶν εἰρημένων οὐ πρέπει σοι Isoc.1.44
; κατοικτῖραι.., εἰ.. οὐδεὶς ἐς ἑκατοστὸν ἔτος περιέσται Hdt.7.46
, cf. S.Aj. 1242; so also δεινὸν γὰρ ἂν εἴη πρῆγμα, εἰ Σάκας μὲν καταστρεψάμενοι δούλους ἔχομεν, Ἕλληνας δὲ οὐ τιμωρησόμεθα Hdt.7.9
, cf. And.1.102, Lys.20.8 (prob.), D.8.55;
οὐκ αἰσχρόν, εἰ τὸ μὲν Ἀργείων πλῆθος οὐκ ἐφοβήθη τὴν Λακεδαιμονίων ἀρχήν, ὑμεῖς δ' ὄντες Ἀθηναῖοι βάρβαρον ἄνθρωπον.. φοβήσεσθε
; Id.15.23
, cf. Hdt.5.97, Lys.22.13.

c when οὐ belongs closely to the next word (v. A. I), or is quoted unchanged, εἰ, ὡς νῦν φήσει, οὐ παρεσκευάσατο D.54.29
codd.; εἰ δ' οὐκέτ' ἐστί (sc. ὥσπερ λέγεις)
, τίνι τρόπῳ διεφθάρη
; E. Ion 347
.

8 οὐ is used with inf. in orat. obliq., when it represents the ind. of orat. recta, φαμὲν δέ οἱ οὐ τελέεσθαι Od.4.664
, cf. Il.17.174, 21.316, S.Ph. 1389, etc.; λέγοντες οὐκ εἶναι αὐτόνομοι Th.1.67
, cf. Pl.R. 348c, X.Cyr.1.6.18; οἶμαι.. οὐκ ὀλίγον ἔργον αὐτὸ εἶναι Pl.R. 369b
, cf. S.OT 1051, Th.1.71, etc.; ἡγήσαντο ἡμᾶς οὐ περιόψεσθαι ib.39. (For the occasional use of μή, v. μή B. 5c; sts. we have οὐ and μή in consecutive clauses, οἶμαι σοῦ κάκιον οὐδὲν ἂν τούτων κρατύνειν μηδ' ἐπιθύνειν χερί S.Ph. 1058s
q.; αὐτὸ ἡγοῦμαι οὐ διδακτὸν εἶναι μηδὲ.. παρασκευαστόν Pl.Prt. 319b
.)

9 οὐ is used with the part., when it can be resolved into a finite sentence with οὐ, as after Verbs of knowing and showing, τὸν κατθανόνθ' ὁρῶντες οὐ τιμώμενον E.Hec. 316
; κατενόησαν οὐ πολλοὺς τοὺς Θηβαίους ὄντας Th.2
. 3; ἔργῳ δηλώσω οὐ παραγενόμενος Antipho2.4.8
, etc.; or into a causal sentence, τῶν βαρβάρων οἱ πολλοὶ ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ διεφθάρησαν νέειν οὐκ ἐπιστάμενοι Hdt.8.89
; τὴν Μένδην πόλιν ἅτε οὐκ ἀπὸ ξυμβάσεως ἀνοιχθεῖσαν διήρπασαν Th.4.130
; or into a concessive sentence, δόξω γυναῖκα καίπερ οὐκ ἔχων ἔχειν E.Alc. 352
, cf. S.Ph. 377, etc.: regularly with ὡς and part., ὡς οὐχὶ συνδράσουσα νουθετεῖς τάδε Id.El. 1025
, etc.; ἐθορυβεῖτε ὡς οὐ ποιήσοντες ταῦτα Lys.12.73
, cf. S.Ph. 884, Aj. 682, Hdt.7.99, Th.1.2,5,28,68,90; ὥσπερ οὐ πάντας τούτῳ τῷ τεκμηρίῳ χρωμένους Lycurg.90
, cf. Th.8.1, Isoc.4.11:—for exceptions, v. μή B. 6.

b when the part. is used with the Art., μή is generally used, unless there is a distinct reference to a fact, when οὐ is occasionally found, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς οὐκ οὔσης ἔτι [πόλεως] ὁρμώμενοι Th.1.74
; τοὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει οὐδὲν εἰδότας Id.4.111
; οἱ οὐκ ἐθέλοντες Antipho 6.26
; τῶν οὐ βουλομένων And.1.9
; τοὺς οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντας ἀκρίτους ἀπέκτειναν Lys.12.82
, cf. τὸν οὐδὲ συμπενθῆσαι τὰς τῆς πατρίδος συμφορὰς τολμήσαντα (preceded by τὸν.. μήτε ὅπλα θέμενον ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος μήτε τὸ σῶμα παρασχόντα κτλ.) Lycurg.43; τὸ οὐχ εὑρημένον Pl.R. 427e
.

10 Adjectives and abstract Substantives with the article commonly take μή (v. μή B. 7
) but οὐ is occasionally used, τὰς οὐκ ἀναγκαίας πόσεις X.Lac.5.4
; τοὺς οὐδένας E.IA 371
; τὸν οὐδέν Id.Ph. 598
(whereas ὁ μηδείς, τὸ μηδέν is the rule); τὴν τῶν γεφυρῶν οὐ διάλυσιν the non- dissolution of the bridges, the fact of their notbeing broken up, Th.1.137; ἡ οὐ περιτείχισις Id.3.95
; ἡ τῶν χωρίων οὐκ ἀπόδοσις Id.5.35
, cf.E. Hipp. 196 (anap.); so without the article, ἐν οὐ καιπῷ Id.Ba. 1287
; οὐ πάλης ὕπο ib. 455.

11 for οὐ μή, v. sub voc.

12 in questions οὐ ordinarily expects a positive answer, οὔ νυ καὶ ἄλλοι ἔασι ..; Il.10.165; οὐχ ὁράᾳς ..; dost thou not see? Od.17.545;
οὐκ.. ᾐσθόμην
; A.Pr. 956
: so as a strong form of imper.,
οὐκ ἀπαλλάξει
; E. Ion 524
;
οὐκ ἀποκτενεῖτε τὸν μιαρὸν τοῦτον ἄνθρωπον
; Din.1.18
;
οὐκ εἶ καταπιὼν Εὐριπίδην
; Ar.Ach. 484
; βάλλε, βάλλε folld. by οὐ βαλεῖς; οὐ βαλεῖς; ib. 281 and 283, cf. S.Ant. 885: also with opt. and ἄν, οὐκ ἂν δὴ τόνδ' ἄνδρα μάχης ἐρύσαιο ( = ἔρυσαι) ; Il.5.456; οὐκ ἂν φράσειας ( = φράσον) ; S.Ph. 1222; but in questions introduced by οὐ δή, οὐ δή του, οὔ που, οὔ τί που, a doubt is implied of the statement involved, and an appeal is made to the hearers, οὐ δή ποθ' ἡμῖν ξυγγενὴς ἥκεις ποθέν; surely you are not..? Id.El. 1202, cf. Ph. 900; οὔ τί που οὗτος Ἀπόλλων ..; Pi.P.4.87, cf. S.Ph. 1233, E.IA 670, Hel. 135, Ion 1113, Ar.Ra. 522, 526.

B POSITION. οὐ is generally put immediately before the word which it negatives, οὐκ ἐκεῖνον ἐθεώμην.—ἀλλὰ τίνα μήν ; ἔφη ὁ Τιγράνης X.Cyr.3.1.41
; οὐχ αἱ τρίχες ποιοῦσιν αἱ λευκαὶ φρονεῖν Men.639
; οὐ διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀκοντίζειν οὐκ ἔβαλον αὐτὸν ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸ μηδενὶ ὑπὸ τὸ ἀκόντιον ὑπελθεῖν Antipho 3.4.6
: in Poetry the position is freq. more free, κίνδυνος ἄναλκιν οὐ φῶτα λαμβάνει Pi.O.1.81
; οὐ ψεύδεϊ τέγξω λόγον ib. 4.19; κατακρύπτει δ' οὐ κόνις ib.8.79; χρὴ πρὸς θεὸν οὐκ ἐρίζειν Id.P. 2.88
: sts. emphatically at the end of the clause, καὶ τοὶ γὰρ αἰθοίσας ἔχοντες σπέρμ' ἀνέβαν φλογὸς οὔ Id.O.7.48
; ταρβήσει γὰρ οὔ S.Aj. 545
: in clauses opposed by μέν and δέ the οὐ (or μή) is freq. placed at the end, βούλονται μέν, δύνανται δ' οὔ Th.6.38
; οὗτος δ' ἦν καλὸς μέν, μέγας δ' οὔ X.An.4.4.3
; ἔδοξέ μοι ὁ ἀνὴρ δοκεῖν μὲν εἶναι σοφὸς.., εἶναι δ' οὔ Pl.Ap. 21c
; so τὸ Πέρσας μὲν λέληθε, ἡμέας μέντοι οὔ Hdt.1.139
: freq. with ὁ μὲν.. ὁ δέ, οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μέν, τὰς δ' οὔ Pl.Cri. 47a
, cf. Ap. 24e, R. 475b, etc.; Λέριοι κακοί, οὐχ ὁ μέν, ὃς δ' οὔ Phoc.1
: sts. in the first clause after μέν, οἱ δὲ στρατηγοὶ ἐξῆγον μὲν οὔ, συνεκάλεσαν δέ X.An.6.4.20
, cf. 4.8.2, Cyr.1.4.10, Pl.Phd. 73b; κατώρα πᾶν μὲν οὒ τὸ στρατόπεδον Hdt.7.208
.

C ACCUMULATION. A simple neg. (οὐ or μή) is freq. repeated in composition with Prons., Advbs., or Conjs., as οὐδείς or μηδείς, οὐδέ or μηδέ, οὐδαμῶς or μηδαμῶς, first in Hom., οὔ μιν ὁΐομαιοὐδὲ πεπύσθαι λυγρῆς ἀγγελίης Il.17.641
; ἀλλ' οὔ μοι Τρώων τόσσον μέλει ἄλγος ὀπίσσω οὔτ' αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης οὔτε Πριάμοιο ἄνακτος 6.450
; οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδὲν κρεῖσσον οἰκείου φίλου E.Andr. 986
: the first neg. may be a compd., καθεύδων οὐδεὶς οὐδενὸς ἄξιος οὐδὲν μᾶλλον τοῦ μὴ ζῶντος Pl. Lg. 808b
; οὐδενὶ οὐδαμῇ οὐδαμῶς οὐδεμίαν κοινωνίαν ἔχει Id.Prm. 166a
(similarly with μή, Phdr. 236e): or a neg. Adj., ἀδύνατος οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλὴν λέγειν μάτην E.Andr. 746
; οὐ follows the compd. neg., οὐδ' εἰ πάντες ἔλθοιεν Πέρσαι, πλήθει γε οὐχ ὑπερβαλοίμεθ' ἂν τοὺς πολεμίους X. Cyr.2.1.8
; οὐδ' ἂν ἡ πόλις ἄρα ([etym.] ὅπερ ἄρτι ἐλέγομεν ) ὅλη τοιοῦτον ποιῇ, οὐκ ἐπαινέσῃ Pl.R. 426b
, cf. Smp. 204a: sts. a confirmative Particle accompanies the first οὐ or οὐδέ, and the neg. is repeated with emphasis, οὐδὲ μὲν οὐδέ μ' ἔασκες Il.19.295
; οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ Δρύαντος υἱὸς.. δὴν ἧν 6.130
, v. οὐδέ C. 11; οὐ μέντοι οὐδὲ αὖ ὡς σύ μοι δοκεῖς οἴεσθαι Pl.Prt. 332a
: so also in Trag. and [dialect] Att. without any such Particle, οὐ σμικρός, οὔχ, ἁγὼν ὅδε not small, no, is this struggle, S.OC 587; θεοῖς τέθνηκεν οὗτος, οὐ κείνοισιν, οὔ Id.Aj. 970
, cf.Ar.Ra.28, 1308, X.Smp. 2.4, Pl.R. 390c.

2 when the compd. neg. precedes and the simple neg. follows with the Verb, the opposing negs. produce an emphatic positive, οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων ἀδικῶν τίσιν οὐκ ἀποτείσει Orac. ap. Hdt.5.56; γλώσσης κρυφαῖον οὐδὲν οὐ διέρχεται S.Fr. 935
(but prob. f.l.); οὐδεὶς οὐκ ἔπασχέ τι X.Smp.1.9
.

3 similarly each of two simple negs. may retain its negating force, ὥσπερ οὐ διὰ πρᾳότητα καὶ ἀσχολίαν τὴν ὑμετέραν οὐ δεδωκὼς ὑμῖν δίκην Lys.6.34
; ἐγὼ δ' οὐκ οἶμαι.. οὐ δεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀμύνεσθαι Id.13.52
(similarly with μή, D.19.77): sts. a combination of a μέν- clause with a δέ- clause containing οὐ is negatived as a whole by a preceding οὐ, e.g. οὐ γὰρ δήπου Κτησιφῶντα μὲν δύναται διώκειν δι' ἐμέ, ἐμὲ δέ, εἴπερ ἐξελέγξειν ἐνόμιζεν, αὐτὸν οὐκ ἂν ἐγράψατο Id.18.13
.

D PLEONASM OF οὐ: after Verbs of denying, doubting, and disputing, folld. by ὡς or ὅτι with a finite Verb, οὐ is inserted to show the neg. character of the statement, where in Engl. the neg. is not required, ὡς μὲν οὐκ ἀληθῆ ταῦτ' ἐστὶν οὐκ ἔχετ' ἀντιλέγειν D.8.31
, cf. Th.1.77, X.HG2.3.16, Smp.2.12, Isoc.5.57, etc.; οὐδεὶς ἂν τολμήσειεν ἀντειπεῖν ὡς οὐ τὴν μὲν ἐμπειρίαν μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων ἔχομεν Id.6.48
, cf. And.4.34, D.16.4, etc.; οὐκ ἂν ἀρνηθεῖεν ἔνιοι ὡς οὐκ εἰσὶ τοιοῦτοι Id.9.54
; ἀρνεῖσθαι ὅτι οὐ παρῆν X.Ath.2.17
; οὐδ' αὐτὸς ὁ Λάμπις ἔξαρνος ἐγένετο ὡς οὐκ εἴη εἰρηκὼς κτλ. D.34.49; ἀμφισβητεῖν ὡς οὐχὶ.. δοτέον δίκην Pl.Euthphr.8c
, cf. R. 476d, Prm. 135a; ἀπιστεῖν ὅτι οὐ .. Id.Men. 89d; ἀνέλπιστον καταστῆσαί τισιν ὡς οὐκ ἔσται μεταγνῶναι Th. 3.46
: οὐ is sts. thus used in the second member of a negative comparative sentence, ἥκει ὁ Πέρσης οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον ἐπ' ἡμέας ἢ οὐ καὶ ἐπ' ὑμέας Hdt.4.118
, cf. 5.94, 7.16.γ, Th.2.62,3.36: after πλήν, X.Lac. 15.6, D.18.45.

E OMISSION OF οὐ: οὐ is sts. omitted, esp. by Poets, when it may be supplied from the next clause, γῆ δ' οὐδ' ἀὴρ οὐδ' οὐρανὸς ἦν Ar.Av. 694
; σιδήρῳ οὐδ' ἀργύρῳ χρέωνται οὐδέν Hdt.1.215
; ῥοδιακὴ οὖς οὐδὲ πυθμένα οὐκ ἔχουσα Inscr.Délos 313a84
(iii B. C.).

F in Poetry, if ἤ stands before οὐ, the two sounds coalesce into one syllable, as in ἦ οὐχ Il.5.349
, cf. Od.1.298; so, in [dialect] Att., μὴ οὐ S. OT 283
, etc., and ἐγὼ οὔτε ib. 332, ἐγὼ οὐ Ar.Eq. 340
.—This synizesis is general in [dialect] Ep., universal in [dialect] Att.

G FORM. οὐ is used before consonants (including the digamma, e.g. before ἕθεν, οἱ, e(, Il.1.114, 2.392, 24.214, but not before ὅς Possess., οὐχ ᾧ πατρί Od.13.265
, cf. οὐκ ἐπέεσσι Il.15.162
, etc.); οὐκ before vowels with spir. lenis, οὐχ before vowels with spir. asper; in our text of Hdt. οὐκ is used before all vowels (prob. because Hdt. had no spir. asper): the [dialect] Ep. form οὐκί [ῐ] is used by Hom. mostly at the end of a clause and at the close of the verse, ὅς τ' αἴτιος ὅς τε καὶ οὐκί Il.15.137
; ἠὲ καὶ οὐκί 2.238
, 300,al.; but in the middle of a verse, 20.255; οὐχί [ῐ] is found twice in Hom., Il.15.716, 16.762, and is common in Trag., where it is freq. employed like οὔ emphatic (supr. B),
τί δ' οὐχί
; A.Ag. 273
,Fr. 310;
πῶς δ' οὐχί
; Id.Supp. 918
, Ar. Pax 1027; ἐμὸς μὲν οὐχί E.IA 859
: also in Prose, Th.1.120,al., 1 Ep.Cor. 5.12, etc.: the diphthong is genuine and always written ου ( ουκ, ουδε, etc.) in early Inscrr., IG12.10.22, etc.; in iv B.C. rarely written οκ, ib. 22.1635.112,116,121; οὐ abbreviated ο, Suid.s.v. Φιλοξένου γραμμάτιον.

H ACCENTUATION. οὐ is oxytone acc. to Hdn.Gr.1.494 (text doubtfulin 504): Arist.SE 166b6, referring to Il.23.328 τὸ μὲν ου (i.e. οὐ = οὒ) καταπύθεται ὄμβρῳ, says λύουσι.. τῇ προσῳδίᾳ λέγοντες τὸ ου ὀξύτερον (i.e. οὗ), cf. 178b3. In codd. the word is written oxytone when folld. by a pause (v. supr. B), and is usu. written without any accent in other cases.

I οὐ in connexion with other Particles will be found in alphabetical order, οὐ γάρ, οὐ μή, etc.—The corresponding forms of μή should be compared.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > οὐ
8 δικαιοσύνη

δικαιοσύνη, ης, ἡ (s. δίκαιος; Theognis, Hdt.+) gener. the quality of being upright. Theognis 1, 147 defines δ. as the sum of all ἀρετή; acc. to Demosth. (20, 165) it is the opp. of κακία. A strict classification of δ. in the NT is complicated by freq. interplay of abstract and concrete aspects drawn from OT and Gr-Rom. cultures, in which a sense of equitableness combines with awareness of responsibility within a social context.

① the quality, state, or practice of judicial responsibility w. focus on fairness, justice, equitableness, fairness

ⓐ of human beings (a common theme in honorary ins, e.g. IPriene 71, 14f; 22f of a judge named Alexis; Danker, Benefactor 346–48; cp. Aristot., EN 5, 1, 8, 1129a τὸ μὲν δίκαιον ἄρα τὸ νόμιμον καὶ τὸ ἴσον ‘uprightness consists of that which is lawful and fair’; Ath. 34:2 ἔστι δὲ δ. ἴσα ἴσοις ἀμείβειν ‘uprightness means to answer like with like’; for association of δ. with judgment s. also Diog. L. 3, 79; in contexts of praise δ. suggests authority involving juridical responsibility FX 7, ’81, 255 n. 229) δ. κρίσεως ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος uprightness is the beginning and end of judgment B 1:6. Melchizedek as βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης Hb 7:2. ἐργάζεσθαι δικαιοσύνην administer justice Hb 11:33; κρίνειν ἐν δ. (Ps 71:2f; 95:13; Sir 45:26; PsSol 8:24) judge justly Ac 17:31, cp. Mk 16:14 v.l. (Freer ms. line 5 in N. app.); Ro 9:28 v.l. (Is 10:22). ποιεῖν κρίμα καὶ δ. practice justice and uprightness 1 Cl 13:1 (Jer 9:23). καθιστάναι τοὺς ἐπισκοπούς ἐν δ. appoint overseers in uprightness= who will serve justly 1 Cl 42:5 (Is 60:17). David rejoices in God’s δ. 1 Cl 18:15 (Ps 50:16; s. ἀγαλλιάω, end).

ⓑ of transcendent figures (Pla. τὴν δ. θεοῦ νόμον ὑπελάμβανεν ‘considered divine justice [i.e. apportionment of reward or retribution in accordance with behavior] a principle’ or ‘system’ that served as a deterrent of crime Diog. L. 3, 79). Of an apocalyptic horseman ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ κρινεῖ Rv 19:11.

② quality or state of juridical correctness with focus on redemptive action, righteousness. Equitableness is esp. associated w. God (cp. Paradoxogr. Vat. 43 Keller αἰτεῖται παρὰ τ. θεῶν οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλὴν δικαιοσύνης), and in our lit. freq. in connection w. exercise of executive privilege in conferring a benefit. Hence God’s δ. can be the opposite of condemnation 2 Cor 3:9 (s. below); in it God is revealed as judge Rom 3:5—in contrast to human wrath, which beclouds judgment—displaying judicial integrity 3:25 (on this pass. s. also below). Cp. ἐκάλεσά σε ἐν δ. B 14:7 (Is 42:6). Also of equitable privilege allotted by God 2 Pt 1:1.—In Pauline thought the intimate association of God’s interest in retaining a reputation for justice that rewards goodness and requites evil, while at the same time working out a plan of salvation for all humanity, complicates classification of his use of δικαιοσύνη. On the one hand, God’s δ. is pardoning action, and on the other a way of sharing God’s character with believers, who then exhibit righteousness in the moral sense. God achieves this objective through exercise of executive privilege in dispensing justice equitably without reference to νόμος by making salvation available to all humanity (which shares a common problem of liability to wrath by being unanimously in revolt against God Ro 3:9–18, 23) through faith in God’s action in Jesus Christ. The genitival constr. δ. θεοῦ accents the uniqueness of this δ.: Ro 1:17; 3:21f, 25, 26 (s. these pass. also below; Reumann, 3c end); 10:3, and δ. alone 5:21; 9:30 (3 times); 2 Cor 3:9 (opp. κατάκρισις; cp. Dg 9:3; 5). 2 Cor 5:21 may belong here if δ. is viewed as abstract for concrete=δικαιωθέντες (but s. below). All these refer to righteousness bestowed by God cp. ἡ δωρεὰ τῆς δ. Ro 5:17, also 1 Cor 1:30 (sim. 1QS 11, 9–15; 1QH 4, 30–37). In this area it closely approximates salvation (cp. Is 46:13; 51:5 and s. NSnaith, Distinctive Ideas of the OT ’46, 207–22, esp. 218–22; EKäsemann, ZTK 58, ’61, 367–78 [against him RBultmann, JBL 83, ’64, 12–16]). According to some interpreters hunger and thirst for uprightness Mt 5:6 perh. offers (but s. 3a below) a related eschatological sense (‘Kingdom of God’, FNötscher, Biblica 31, ’50, 237–41=Vom A zum NT, ’62, 226–30).—Keeping the law cannot bring about uprightness Ro 3:21; Gal 2:21; 3:21, because δ. ἐκ τοῦ νόμου uprightness based on the law Ro 10:5 (cp. 9:30f), as ἰδία δ. one’s own (self-made) upr. 10:3, is impossible. God’s δ. without ref. to νόμος is to be apprehended by faith Ro 1:17; 3:22, 26; 4:3ff, 13; 9:30; 10:4, 6, 10 (cp. Hb 11:7 ἡ κατὰ πίστιν δ. righteousness based on faith; s. B-D-F §224, 1), for which reason faith is ‘calculated as righteousness’ (Gen 15:6; Ps 105:31; 1 Macc 2:52) Ro 4:3, 5f, 9, 11, 13, 22; Gal 3:6 (cp. Hb 11:7; Js 2:23; AMeyer, D. Rätsel des Jk 1930, 86ff; 1 Cl 10:6; B 13:7). Of Jesus as our righteousness 1 Cor 1:30.—As gift and power Ro 5:17, 21, and because it is intimately associated with the δύναμις of Christ’s resurrection Phil 3:9f (s. below), this righteousness enables the redeemed to respond and serve God faithfully Ro 6:13 (in wordplay opp. of ἀδικία), 16, 18ff; cp. 1 Cor 1:30 of Christ as instrument of God’s gift of δ.; 2 Cor 3:9. Thus God’s δ. functions as δύναμις 6:7 within Christians 5:21 (i.e. the way God acts in justifying or restoring people to a relationship with God’s self serves as a model for Christian interaction; for a difft. view, s. above) through the Spirit (Ro 8:9) and assures them they will have life that will be fully realized at the end of the age Ro 8:10f; for the time being it is a matter of hope ἐλπὶς δικαιοσύνης Gal 5:5 (cp. Is 51:5); cp. ἡ ἐκ θεοῦ δ. Phil 3:9. Pol 8:1 shares Paul’s view: Christ as ἀρραβὼν τῆς δ.—God’s uprightness as gift τοῦ κυρίου τοῦ ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς στάξαντος τὴν δ. who distills uprightness on you Hv 3, 9, 1.—Such perspectives offer a transition to specific ways in which the redeemed express uprightness.

③ the quality or characteristic of upright behavior, uprightness, righteousness

ⓐ of uprightness in general: Mt 5:6 (cp. 6:33; some interpret 5:6 in an eschatological sense, s. 2 above; on desire for δ. cp. ἐπιθυμία τῆς δ. Hm 12, 2, 4); Mt 5:10, 20 (s. b, below); Hm 10, 1, 5; Dg 10:8; λόγος δικαιοσύνης Hb 5:13; Pol 9:1 (s. also Epict., Fgm. Stob. 26; when a man is excited by the λόγος in meetings, he should give expression to τὰ τῆς δικαιοσύνης λόγια). πάσχειν διὰ δ. 1 Pt 3:14. ἄγγελος τῆς δ. Hm 6, 2, 1; 3; 8; 10. ῥήματα δ. 8:9. 10, 1, 5; Dg 10:8; Pol 2:3; 3:1; ἐντολὴ δ. commandment of upr. Pol 3:3; 9:1.—Mt 6:33 of the kind of δ. God expects (on δ. as characteristic required by God acc. to Jewish perspective s. Bousset, Rel.³ 387ff; 379ff; 423; cp. KFahlgren, Sẹdāḳā, nahestehende u. entgegengesetzte Begriffe im Alten Testament, diss. Uppsala ’32.—S. Diog. L. 3, 83 on Plato’s view of δικαιοσύνη περὶ θεούς or δ. πρὸς τοὺς θεούς=performance of prescribed duties toward gods; s. also ref. to 3, 79 at 1b above). Christ’s δ. Dg 9:3, 5. διαλέγεσθαι περὶ δ. Ac 24:25. Opp. ἀδικία (Hippol., Ref. 4, 43, 12; Did., Gen. 20, 27) 2 Cl 19:2; Dg 9:1. As ἀρετή Hm 1:2; Hs 6, 1, 4; 8, 10, 3. Opp. ἀνομία 2 Cor 6:14; cp. 2 Cor. 11:15 (ironical); Hb 1:9 (Ps 44:8); ἁμαρτία, which is the dominating power before δ. θεοῦ comes into play Ro 6:16, 18–20; cp. 1 Pt 2:24. ἐργάζεσθαι δ. (Ps 14:2) do what is right Ac 10:35; accomplish righteousness Js 1:20 (W-S. §30, 7g); Hv 2, 2, 7; 2, 3, 3; m 5, 1, 1; 12, 3, 1; 12, 6, 2; Hs 9, 13, 7. Also ἔργον δικαιοσύνης ἐργάζεσθαι 1 Cl 33:8. Opp. οὐδὲν ἐργάζεσθαι τῇ δ. Hs 5, 1, 4; ποιεῖν (τὴν) δ. (2 Km 8:15; Ps 105:3; Is 56:1; 58:2; 1 Macc 14:35 al.) do what is right 1J 2:29; 3:7, 10; Rv 22:11; 2 Cl 4:2; 11:7. Also πράσσειν τὴν δ. 2 Cl 19:3; διώκειν τὴν δ. (cp. Sir 27:8 διώκ. τὸ δίκαιον) seek to attain/achieve upr. Ro 9:30; 1 Ti 6:11; 2 Ti 2:22; 2 Cl 18:2; δ. ἀσκεῖν Hm 8:10. ὁδὸς (τῆς) δ. (ὁδός 3ab) Mt 21:32; 2 Pt 2:21; B 1:4; 5:4. προπορεύσεται ἔμπροσθεν σου ἡ δ. 3:4 (Is 58:8); cp. 4:12. κατορθοῦσθαι τὰς ὁδοὺς ἐν δ. walk uprightly Hv 2, 2, 6; τῇ δ. ζήσωμεν live uprightly 1 Pt 2:24. πύλη δ. gate of upr. 1 Cl 48:2 (Ps 117:19), cp. vs. 4. ἐν οἷς δ. κατοικεῖ (cp. Is 32:16) in which righteousness dwells 2 Pt 3:13. Of Christ’s body δικαιοσύνης ναο͂ς AcPlCor 2:17. παιδεία ἡ ἐν δ. training in uprightness 2 Ti 3:16. ἔργα τὰ ἐν δ. righteous deeds Tit 3:5. λαμπρότης ἐν δ. rejoicing in uprightness 1 Cl 35:2; ἐχθρὸς πάσης δ. enemy of every kind of upr. Ac 13:10. W. ὁσιότης (Wsd 9:3): holiness and upr. (as the relig. and moral side of conduct; cp. 1QS 1:5; 8:2; 11:9–15; 1QH 4:30f) Lk 1:75 (λατρεύειν ἐν δ. as Josh 24:14); Eph 4:24; 1 Cl 48:4. W. πίστις (OGI 438, 8; 1 Macc 14:35; Just., D. 110, 3) Pol 9:2; cp. 2 Pt 1:1. With εἰρήνη (Is 39:8; 48:18) and χαρά Ro 14:17; cp. 1 Cl 3:4; Hb 7:2 (but s. 1a, above). W. ἀλήθεια (Is 45:19; 48:1) Eph 5:9; 1 Cl 31:2; 62:2; Hs 9, 25, 2. W. ἀγάπη 2 Cl 12:1. W. ἀγαθωσύνη Eph 5:9. W. ἁγνεία Hs 9, 16, 7. W. γνῶσις κυρίου (cp. Pr 16:8) D 11:2. ὅπλα (τῆς) δ. tools or weapons of uprightness Ro 6:13; 2 Cor 6:7; Pol 4:1; θῶραξ τῆς δ. (Is 59:17; Wsd 5:18) breastplate of upr. Eph 6:14. τέκνα δικαιοσύνης (opp. ὀργῆς) AcPlCor 2:19. διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης servants of upr. 2 Cor 11:15; Pol 5:2; μισθός δ. D 5:2; B 20:2; μέρος δ. portion in (eternal salvation) which is meant for righteousness ApPt Rainer 6; καρπὸς δικαιοσύνης (Pr 3:9; 11:30; 13:2) produce of uprightness (ApcSed 12:5) Phil 1:11; Hb 12:11; Js 3:18; Hs 9, 19, 2; GJs 6:3. ὁ τῆς δ. στέφανος the crown of upr. (w. which the upright are adorned; cp. TestLevi 8:2; Rtzst., Mysterienrel.³ 258; a common theme in honorary ins recognizing distinguished public service, s. indexes SIG, OGI and other ins corpora; Danker, Benefactor 345–47; s. also the boast of Augustus, s.v. δίκαιος 1aα) 2 Ti 4:8; cp. ἡ τ. δικαιοσύνης δόξα the glory of upr. ending of Mk in the Freer ms. ln. 11f. Described as a characteristic to be taught and learned, because it depends on a knowledge of God’s will: κῆρυξ δ. preacher of upr. 2 Pt 2:5 (cp. Ar. 15:2 τῇ δ. τοῦ κηρύγματος). διδάσκειν δ. teach upr. (of Paul) 1 Cl 5:7. μέρος τι ἐκ τῆς δ. a portion of uprightness Hv 3, 1, 6; cp. 3, 6, 4; δ. μεγάλην ἐργάζεσθαι m 8:2.—ἐλέγχειν περὶ δικαιοσύνης convict w. regard to uprightness (of Jesus) J 16:8, 10 (s. WHatch, HTR 14, 1921, 103–5; HWindisch: Jülicher Festschr. 1927, 119f; HTribble, Rev. and Expos. 32, ’37, 269–80; BLindars, BRigaux Festschr., ’70, 275–85).

ⓑ of specific action righteousness in the sense of fulfilling divine expectation not specifically expressed in ordinances (Orig., C. Cels. 7, 18, 39; Did., Gen. 188, 27: οἱ κατὰ δ. ζῶντες) Mt 3:15=ISm 1:1; of a superior type Mt 5:20 (s. JMoffatt, ET 13, 1902, 201–6, OOlevieri, Biblica 5, 1924, 201ff; Betz, SM 190f); not to win plaudits 6:1. To please outsiders as well as oneself 2 Cl 13:1. W. characteristic restriction of mng. mercy, charitableness (cp. Tob 12:9) of God, whose concern for the poor 2 Cor 9:9 (Ps 111:9) is exemplary for the recipients of the letter vs. 10; participation in such activity belongs, according to Mt 6:1f (cp. δίκαιος 1:19: Joseph combines justice and mercy), to the practice of piety (on the development of the word’s mng. in this direction s. Bousset, Rel.³ 380). Pl. (B-D-F §142; W-S. §27, 4d; Rob. 408 δικαιοσύναι righteous deeds (Ezk 3:20; 33:13; Da 9:18) 2 Cl 6:9. δικαιοσύναι righteous deeds (Ezk 3:20; 33:13; Da 9:18; TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 12 [Stone p. 30]) 2 Cl 6:9. ἀρετὴ δικαιοσύνης Hm 1:2; Hs 6, 1, 4; cp. 8, 10, 3.

ⓒ uprightness as determined by divine/legal standards δ. θεοῦ upr. that meets God’s standard Js 1:20 (W-S. 30, §7g).—Ro 10:5; Gal 2:21; 3:21; Phil 3:6; 3:9.—ASchmitt, Δικαιοσύνη θεοῦ: JGeffcken Festschr. ’31, 111–31; FHellegers, D. Gerechtigkeit Gottes im Rö., diss. Tüb. ’39; AOepke, TLZ 78, ’53, 257–64.—Dodd 42–59; ADescamps, Studia Hellenistica, ’48, 69–92.—S. also JRopes, Righteousness in the OT and in St. Paul: JBL 22, 1903, 211ff; JGerretsen, Rechtvaardigmaking bij Pls 1905; GottfrKittel, StKr 80, 1907, 217–33; ETobac, Le problème de la Justification dans S. Paul 1908; EDobschütz, Über d. paul. Rechtfertigungslehre: StKr 85, 1912, 38–87; GWetter, D. Vergeltungsged. b. Pls 1912, 161ff; BWestcott, St. Paul and Justification 1913; WMacholz, StKr 88, 1915, 29ff; EBurton ICC, Gal. 1921, 460–74; WMichaelis, Rechtf. aus Glauben b. Pls: Deissmann Festschr. 1927, 116–38; ELohmeyer, Grundlagen d. paul. Theologie 1929, 52ff; HBraun, Gerichtsged. u. Rechtfertigungslehre b. Pls. 1930; OZänker, Δικαιοσύνη θεοῦ b. Pls: ZST 9, ’32, 398–420; FFilson, St. P.’s Conception of Recompense ’31; WGrundmann, ZNW 32, ’33, 52–65; H-DWendland, D. Mitte der paul. Botschaft ’35; RGyllenberg, D. paul. Rechtfertigungslehre u. das AT: Studia Theologica (Riga) I ’35, 35–52; HJager, Rechtvaardiging en zekerheid des geloofs (Ro 1:16f; 3:21–5:11) ’39; HHofer, D. Rechtfertigungsverk. des Pls nach neuerer Forschg. ’40; VTaylor, Forgiveness and Reconciliation ’41; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 266–80, Eng. tr. KGrobel ’51, I 270–85; SSchulz, ZTK 56, ’59, 155–85 (Qumran and Paul); CMüller, FRL 86, ’64 (Ro 9–11); JBecker, Das Heil Gottes, ’64; PStuhlmacher, Gerechtigkeit Gottes b. Paulus, ’65; JReumann, Int 20, ’66, 432–52 (Ro 3:21–31); HBraun, Qumran II, ’66, 165–80; JZiesler, The Mng. of Righteousness in Paul, ’72; ESanders, Paul and Palestinian Judaism, ’77 (s. index 625; appendix by MBrauch 523–42 rev. of discussions in Germany); SWilliams, JBL 99, ’80, 241–90.—CPerella, De justificatione sec. Hb: Biblica 14, ’33, 1–21; 150–69. S. also the lit. on πίστις and ἁμαρτία.—On the whole word s. RAC X 233–360; AKöberle, Rechtfertigung u. Heiligung 1930; EDNT I 325–30.—DELG s.v. δίκη. M-M. EDNT.TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > δικαιοσύνη
9 περιπατέω

περιπατέω impf. περιεπάτουν; fut. περιπατήσω; 1 aor. περιεπάτησα and ἐπεριπάτησα ApcEsdr s. 1a; plpf. 3 sg. περι(ε)πεπατήκει Ac 14:8 v.l. (on augm. in the plpf. s. B-D-F §66, 1; Mlt.-H. 190f) (Aristoph., X., Pla.+)

① to go here and there in walking, go about, walk around

ⓐ w. an indication of the place where one walks about (Demosth. 54, 7 ἐν ἀγορᾷ; ApcEsdr 6:12 p. 31, 17 Tdf. ἐν τῷ ὄρει; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 117 ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς; Just.. D. 1, 1 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ ξυστοῦ περιπάτοις ‘on the walkways of the Xystos’) ἐν τριβόλοις γυμνοῖς ποσὶ περιπατεῖν walk among thistles barefoot Hs 9, 20, 3. ἐν τῇ γῇ ταύτῃ GJs 6:1. In several places one might translate stay, spend some time, be, though without the idea of remaining on the same spot (Chion, Ep. 13, 1 ἐν τῷ Ὠιδείῳ; 2 Km 11:2; Da 3:92 of the men in the fiery furnace; 4:29; En 17:6; Jos., Ant. 7, 130): ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ (Cebes 1, 1.—Diog. L. 4, 24 refers to Crantor walking about in the temple of Asclepius) Mk 11:27; J 10:23; Ox 840, 9. ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ J 7:1a; cp. vs. 1b. ὁ περιπατῶν ἐν μέσῳ τῶν ἑπτὰ λυχνιῶν Rv 2:1. π. ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις appear among the Judeans J 11:54.

ⓑ go about w. indication of the way one is clothed ἐν στολαῖς Mk 12:38; Lk 20:46. ἐν λευκοῖς clothed in white Rv 3:4 (Epict. 3, 22, 10 ἐν κοκκίνοις περιπ.; Tat. 2:1 ἐν πορφυρίδι περιπατῶν). ἐν δέρμασιν αἰγείοις 1 Cl 17:1.

ⓒ gener. walk, go π. διὰ τοῦ φωτός walk in the light Rv 21:24. π. εἰς τὸν ἀγρόν (go for a) walk in the country Hs 2:1. ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης (ἐπί 1a and cp. Job 9:8.—GBertram, Le chemin sur les eaux: Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. I 1928, 137–66) Mt 14:26; Mk 6:48f; J 6:19. AcPl Ha 7, 27 and 34. ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν Mt 14:25; J 6:19 P⁷⁵. ἐπὶ τὰ ὕδατα Mt 14:29 (ἐπί 4bβ). παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν 4:18 (παρά C1a). π. μετά τινος go about w. someone J 6:66; walk with someone Hs 9, 6, 2a; 9, 10, 1. π. περί τι walk around someth. Hs 9, 12, 7; also κύκλῳ τινός Hs 9, 6, 2b. μετά τινος κύκλῳ τινὸς π. walk with someone around someth. Hs 9, 11, 5. π. ἐπάνω walk over Lk 11:44 (ἐπάνω 1a). More closely defined ὁμαλῶς π. καὶ ἀπροσκόπως Hm 6, 1, 4. γυμνὸν π. go naked Rv 16:15. μόνον π. walk alone Hv 4, 1, 3 (cp. Jos., C. Ap. 1, 281). περιεπάτεις ὅπου ἤθελες you used to go where you pleased J 21:18 (En 17:6 ὅπου πᾶσα σὰρξ οὐ περιπατεῖ).—Abs. walk (about) (Diocles 141 p. 180, 19f; Diod S 1, 70, 10; EpArist 175; Just., D. 127, 2) Mt 9:5; 11:5; 15:31; Mk 2:9; 5:42; 8:24; Lk 5:23; 7:22; J 5:8f, 11f; 11:9f; Ac 3:6, 8ab, 9, 12; 14:8, 10; 1 Pt 5:8; Rv 9:20 (cp. Ps 113:15); Hv 2, 1, 3; (go for a) walk, be out walking Mk 16:12; Lk 24:17; walk by J 1:36. περιπατῶν ἀφύπνωσα as I walked along I fell asleep Hv 1, 1, 3. περιπατῶν ἀνεμνήσθην as I was walking along I remembered 2, 1, 1.

ⓓ in imagery, and far on the way toward the nonliteral use of the word: doubters are περιπατοῦντες ἐν ταῖς ἀνοδίαις Hv 3, 7, 1. Esp. in John: περιπατεῖν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ J 8:12; 12:35b; 1J 2:11; cp. 1:6. Corresp. ἐν τῷ φωτί vs. 7; ἐν αὐτῇ (=ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ φωτός) B 19:1 (but it may also refer to ἡ γνῶσις; then the pass. would belong under 2aδ below). μέγα δὲ ἀσεβείας ὑπόδειγμα ἐν τούτῳ τῷ κόσμῳ περιεπάτησεν ὁ Ἰούδας Judas went about in this world as a notable example of impiety Papias (3:2). Abs. περιπατεῖτε ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε walk while you have the light J 12:35a.

② to conduct one’s life, comport oneself, behave, live as habit of conduct; fig. ext. of 1:

ⓐ of ‘walk of life’, go about (Philod., Περὶ παρρησίας p. 12 Ol.; Epict. 1, 18, 20; s. Simplicius in Epict. p. 125, 52 Düb. Esp. acc. to OT models: 4 Km 20:3 ἐν ἀληθείᾳ; Pr 8:20 ἐν ὁδοῖς δικαιοσύνης.—Eccl 11:9). In the NT this use of the word is decidedly Pauline (the pastoral epp. do not have the word at all); elsewh. it is reasonably common only in 2J and 3J, live, conduct oneself, walk, always more exactly defined

α. by an adv. ἀξίως τινός Eph 4:1; Col 1:10; 1 Th 2:12; Pol 5:1. ἀτάκτως 2 Th 3:6, 11. εὐσχημόνως Ro 13:13; 1 Th 4:12.

β. by the dat. to denote attendant circumstance, kind, or manner (TestIss 5:8 ἁπλότητι.—B-D-F §198, 5; s. Rob. 528–32) κώμοις καὶ μέθαις Ro 13:13. τοῖς ἔθεσιν Ac 21:21; cp. 15:1 D; πνεύματι π. Gal 5:16. τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι 2 Cor 12:18.

γ. by a comparison ἕκαστον ὡς κέκληκεν ὁ θεός, οὕτως περιπατείτω 1 Cor 7:17. περιπατεῖν καθὼς τὰ ἔθνη περιπατεῖ Eph 4:17; ὡς τέκνα φωτός 5:8.—Phil 3:17; 1J 2:6. The comparison is implied fr. the context (ὡς ἐχθροὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τοῦ Χριστοῦ) Phil 3:18.—πῶς (καθὼς) περιπατεῖτε Eph 5:15; 1 Th 4:1ab.

δ. by a prepositional expr. The sphere in which one lives or ought to live, so as to be characterized by that sphere, is designated by ἐν: pl. in sins Eph 2:2; Col 3:7; in good deeds Eph 2:10; in the Lord’s ordinances B 21:1 (Philo, Congr. Erud. Gr. 87 π. ἐν ταῖς τοῦ θεοῦ κρίσεσι κ. προστάξεσιν). Cp. Hb 13:9. Sing. ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς Ro 6:4. ἐν πανουργίᾳ 2 Cor 4:2. ἐν ἀγάπῃ Eph 5:2. ἐν σοφίᾳ Col 4:5. ἐν (τῇ) ἀληθείᾳ 2J 4; 3J 3f; ἐν ἀκεραιοσύνῃ B 10:4; cp. B 19:1 (s. 1d above). ἐν ἀλλοτρίᾳ γνώμῃ IPhld 3:3. ἐν ἀμώμῳ … συνειδήσει Pol 5:3. ἐν αὐτῇ (=ἐν τῇ ἐντολῇ) 2J 6b. ἐν αὐτῷ (=ἐν τῷ κυρίῳ) Col 2:6.—The norm of conduct is designated by κατὰ w. acc. (s. κατά B5bγ) κατὰ ἄνθρωπον like ordinary (unregenerate) persons 1 Cor 3:3. κατὰ σάρκα according to the old self viz. the ‘flesh’ as opposed to the new self under the ‘spirit’ Ro 8:4; 2 Cor 10:2. κατὰ ἀγάπην Ro 14:15. κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων Mk 7:5. κατὰ τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ 2J 6a.—BEaston, NT Ethical Lists: JBL 51, ’32, 1–12; SWibbing, D. Tugend-u. Lasterkataloge im NT, ’59; EKamlach, Die Form der katalogischen Paränese im NT, ’64; HBraun, Qumran u. das NT II, ’66, 286–301; JHolloway III, ΠΕΡΙΠΑΤΕΩ as a Thematic Marker for Pauline Ethics ’92.

ⓑ rarely of physical life gener.: ἐν τούτῳ τῶ κόσμῳ περιπατεῖν (formulation as in Papias [3:2]) B 10:11. ἐν σαρκί 2 Cor 10:3. διὰ πίστεως περιπατοῦμεν, οὐ διὰ εἴδους 5:7.—B. 690. M-M. EDNT. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > περιπατέω
10 κύριος

1
I. κύριος, ία, ιον(Pind. et al.; ins, pap) comp. κυριώτερος (Just., A II, 13, 3); superl. κυριώτατος (Just., D. 11, 2); adv. κυρίως. The primary mng. relates to possession of power or authority, in various senses: ‘strong, authoritative, valid, ruling’; then to that which is preeminently important principal, essential (Aeschyl. et al.; 4 Macc 1:19; Jos., Ant. 20, 41, C. Ap. 1, 19; 2, 177; Just.; Ath. 22:2) τὸ δὲ κυριώτερον but what is more important IMg 1:2 (cp. Diog. L. 4, 26 ἐν τῷ κυρίῳ=quite definitely).—DELG.
2
II. κύριος, ου, ὁ (the masc. form of the subst. adj. κύριος [s. I], Aeschyl.+; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 92 §385 [=ὁ τὸ κῦρος ἔχων]; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr.; Philo, Joseph., apolog.; loanw. in rabb. For the corresp. fem. s. κυρία.) gener. ‘lord, master’.

① one who is in charge by virtue of possession, owner (X., Symp. 6, 1; Diod S 4, 15, 3; 14, 7, 6; ins, pap, LXX) κ. πάντων Gal 4:1 (Diod S 33, 7, 1; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 1, 13 p. 12, 10 of one who has come of age and controls his own property).

ⓐ of things w. impers. obj. κ. τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος owner of the vineyard (cp. SIG 742, 6 κ. τῆς χώρας) Mt 20:8; 21:40; Mk 12:9; Lk 20:13, 15; ὁ κ. τῆς οἰκίας the master of the house (Ex 22:7; SIG 1215, 28; PTebt 5, 147 [118 B.C.] τοὺς κ. τῶν οἰκιῶν) Mk 13:35. Of a πῶλος: οἱ κ. αὐτοῦ its owners (PHib 34, 3 a span of oxen; Ex 21:29 [αὐτοῦ=τοῦ ταύρου]) Lk 19:33 (ASouter, Exp. 8th ser., 8, 1914, 94f, in connection w. the pl. here and Ac 16:16, 19 thinks of the owners as man and wife; the pl. οἱ κύριοι has this mng. Diod S 34 + 35, Fgm. 2, 10 and 2, 37: a married couple who are slave-owners. On the other hand in the Syntipas collection of Aesop’s Fables 16 p. 534 P. οἱ κύριοι of a dog are a number of metalworkers. On Hebr. background for possible understanding of the pl. in the sing. sense ‘owner’, s. RButh, JBL 104, ’86, 680–85.). The mng. owner easily passes into that of lord, master, one who has full control of someth. (Diod S 5, 42, 5 θανάτου κύριοι=lords over [life and] death; 10, 17, 1 and 2 κ. τοῦ σώματος=master of one’s own body; Ptolem., Apotel. 3, 11, 10 ὁ κ. τῆς ζωῆς; PsSol 2:29 κ. γῆς καὶ θαλάσσης; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 67; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 200) ὁ κ. τοῦ θερισμοῦ the Lord of the harvest (Jos., Ant.4, 227 κύριος ἔστω τὰ φυτὰ καρποῦσθαι) Mt 9:38; Lk 10:2. κ. τοῦ σαββάτου Lord of the Sabbath Mt 12:8; Mk 2:28; Lk 6:5.

ⓑ w. a personal obj.: opp. δοῦλος J 13:16; foll. by gen. of pers. (cp. Judg 19:11; Gen 24:36; TestSol 22:5; TestJob 7:9; TestGad 4:4; JosAs 4:14) Mt 10:24f; 18:31f; 24:48; Lk 12:36. ὁ κ. τοῦ δούλου Lk 12:46. Abs., though the sense is unmistakable (Diod S 8, 5, 3; ApcEsdr 3:14 p. 27, 27f Tdf.) 12:37, 42b; 14:23; J 15:15; cp. Ro 14:4a; Eph 6:9a; Col 4:1. Several masters of the same slave (Billerb. I 430.—TestJos 14:2): δυσὶν κυρίοις δουλεύειν Mt 6:24; Ac 16:16, 19 (s. Souter under a above). κατὰ σάρκα designates more definitely the sphere in which the service-relation holds true οἱ κατὰ σάρκα κ. Eph 6:5; Col 3:22. As a form of address used by slaves κύριε Mt 13:27; 25:20, 22, 24; Lk 13:8; 14:22; 19:16, 18, 20, 25.

② one who is in a position of authority, lord, master

ⓐ of earthly beings, as a designation of any pers. of high position: of husband in contrast to wife 1 Pt 3:6 (Gen 18:12; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 15 [Stone p. 38]; ApcMos 2. cp. Plut., De Virt. Mul. 15 p. 252b; SIG 1189, 7; 1190, 5; 1234, 1); of a father by his son Mt 21:29 (cp. BGU 423, 2 Ἀπίων Ἐπιμάχῳ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ κυρίῳ; 818, 1; 28; Gen 31:35; by his daughter TestJob 46:2; JosAs 4:5); of an official in high position, by those who have dealings with him (cp. PFay 106, 15; 129, 1; 134, 2; BGU 648, 16) Mt 27:63. As a form of address to respected pers. gener.; here, as elsewhere, = our sir (as Mod. Gk.) Mt 25:11; J 12:21; 20:15 (but s. NWyatt, ZNW 81, ’90, 38); Ac 16:30; Rv 7:14 (cp. Epict. 3, 23, 11; 19; Gen 23:6; 44:18; TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 33 [Stone p. 4]; JosAs 7:8 al.). The distinctive Gr-Rom. view of ‘deified’ rulers requires treatment under 2bβ.

ⓑ of transcendent beings

α. as a designation of God (for this custom, which has its roots in the Orient, s. the references in Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Bousset, Kyrios Christos² 1921, 95–98; Dssm., LO 298f [LAE 353ff]; s. also SEG XXXVI, 350 and add. ins cited by DZeller, DDD 918f; LXX (where it freq. replaces the name Yahweh in the Mt); pseudepigr.; Philo, Just.; Hippol. Ref. 8, 17, 1; Orig., C. Cels. 1, 35, 6.—FDoppler, D. Wort ‘Herr’ als Göttername im Griech.: Opusc. philol. v. kath. akad. Philologenverein in Wien I 1926, 42–47; MParca, ASP 31, ’91, 51 [lit.]) ὁ κ. Mt 5:33; Mk 5:19; Lk 1:6, 9, 28, 46; 2:15, 22; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 7:33; 8:24; Eph 6:7 (perh. w. ref. to Christ); 2 Th 3:3; 2 Ti 1:16, 18; Hb 8:2; Js 1:7; 4:15. Without the art. (on the inclusion or omission of the art. s. BWeiss [θεός, beg.]; B-D-F §254, 1; Mlt-Turner 174), like a personal name (οὐδένα κύριον ὀνομνάζουσι πλὴν τὸν θεόν Hippol. Ref. 9, 26, 2) Mt 27:10; Mk 13:20; Lk 1:17, 58; Ac 7:49; Hb 7:21 (Ps 109:4); 12:6 (Pr 3:12); 2 Pt 2:9; Jd 5 (θεὸς Χριστός P⁷²); 9. ἄγγελος κυρίου (LXX, TestSol, GrBar et al.) Mt 1:20, 24; 2:13, 19; 28:2; Lk 1:11; 2:9a; J 5:3 v.l.; Ac 5:19; 7:30 v.l.; 8:26; 12:7, 23. δόξα κυρίου (Is 40:5; PsSol 5:19; 7:31; TestLevi 8:11; ApcMos 37) Lk 2:9b; δούλη κ. 1:38; ἡμέρα κ. Ac 2:20 (Jo 3:4); νόμος κ. Lk 2:23f, 39; τὸ ὄνομα κ. Mt 21:9 (Ps 117:26; PsSol 6:1 al.); Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); πνεῦμα κ. Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39; τὸ ῥῆμα κ. 1 Pt 1:25 (Gen 15:1 al.); φωνὴ κ. (Gen 3:8 al.); Ac 7:31; χεὶρ κ. (Ex 9:3 al.; TestJob 26:4; ApcMos prol.) Lk 1:66. ὁ Χριστὸς κυρίου 2:26 (PsSol 17:32 [Χριστὸς κύριος, s. app.]).—W. the sphere of his lordship more definitely expressed (Diod S 3, 61, 5 Zeus is κ. τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; 6 θεὸς καὶ κ. εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; Jos., Ant. 20, 90 τῶν πάντων κ.; Just., D. 127, 2 κ. τῶν πάντων) κ. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς (PGM 4, 640f; ParJer 5:32 [Harris]) Mt 11:25; Lk 10:21; cp. Ac 17:24. κ. τῶν κυριευόντων Lord of lords 1 Ti 6:15. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1:14; 2 Pt 3:15; Rv 11:15 (LXX; PsSol 10:5). Cp. 22:6 (s. Num 16:22; 27:16). κ. ὁ θεός Lk 1:32; Rv 1:8; with μου (σου, etc.) Mt 4:7 (Dt 6:16), 10 (Dt 6:13); 22:37 (Dt 6:5); Mk 12:29f (Dt 6:4f); Lk 1:16 al. κ. ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1:68 (PsSol 16:3; TestSol 1:13). κ. ὁ θεὸς (ἡμῶν) ὁ παντοκράτωρ God, the (our) Lord, the Almighty Rv 4:8; 15:3; 16:7; 19:6; 21:22 (TestSol D 4:7; cp. ParJer 9:6). κ. Σαβαώθ Ro 9:29 (Is 1:9; TestSol 1:6 al.; Just., D. 64, 2); Js 5:4.—W. prep. ἐνώπιον τοῦ κυρίου Lk 1:15 (Ex 23:17; 1 Km 1:25 al.; TestJob 15:6 al.; TestReub 1:9 al.). παρὰ κυρίου Mt 21:42; Mk 12:11 (both Ps 117:23). παρὰ κυρίῳ 2 Pt 3:8. πρὸς τὸν κύριον Hs 9, 12, 6 (LXX; PsSol 1:1 al.).

β. Closely connected w. the custom of applying the term κ. to deities is that of honoring (deified) rulers with the same title (exx. [2bα beg.] in Ltzm., op. cit.; Bousset 93; Dssm., 299ff [LAE 356]; FKattenbusch, Das apostol. Symbol II 1900, 605ff; KPrümm, Herrscherkult u. NT: Biblica 9, 1928, 3–25; 119–40; 289–301; JFears, RAC XIV, 1047–93; JvanHenten, 1341–52 [lit.]; cp. the attitude of the Lacedaemonians: φοβούμενοι τὸν ἕνα κ. αὐτῶν τὸν Λυκούργου νόμον=‘respecting their one and only lord, the law of Lycurgus’ Orig., C. Cels. 8, 6, 12). Fr. the time of Claudius (POxy. 37, 6; O. Wilck II 1038, 6) we find the Rom. emperors so designated in increasing measure; in isolated cases, even earlier (OGI 606, 1; on Augustus’ attitude s. DioCass. 51, 7f). Ac 25:26.—On deified rulers in gener. s. LCerfaux-JTondriau, Un concurrent du Christianisme: le culte des souverains dans la civilisation gréco-romaine ’57; FTaeger, Charisma, 2 vols. ’57–60; DRoloff, Göttlichkeit, Vergöttlichung und Erhöhung zu seligem Leben, ’70. S. esp. the collection of articles and reviews by various scholars, in Römischer Kaiserkult, ed. AWlosok ’78.

γ. κύριος is also used in ref. to Jesus:

א. in OT quotations, where it is understood of the Lord of the new community ἡ ὁδὸς κ. (Is 40:3) Mt 3:3; Mk 1:3; Lk 3:4; J 1:23. εἶπεν κύριος τ. κυρίῳ μου (Ps 109:1: the first κ. is God, the second Christ; s. Billerb. IV 452–65: Der 110. Ps. in d. altrabb. Lit.; βασιλεὺς αὐτῶν χριστὸς κ. [or κυρίου; s. 2bα] PsSol 17:32) Mt 22:44 (cp. vss. 43, 45); Mk 12:36 (cp. vs. 37); Lk 20:42 (cp. vs. 44); Ac 2:34. ὁ καυχώμενος ἐν κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Cor 1:31 (cp. Jer 9:22f). τὸ ὄνομα κυρίου Ro 10:13 (cp. Jo 3:5). σὺ κατʼ ἀρχάς, κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας Hb 1:10 (cp. Ps 101:26). εἰ ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ κύριος 1 Pt 2:3 (cp. Ps 33:9). 1 Pt 3:15 adds Χριστόν to κύριον ἁγιάσατε Is 8:13.

ב. Apart from OT quots., Mt and Mk speak of Jesus as κύριος only in one pass. (words of Jesus himself) Mk 11:3=Mt 21:3 (but s. RBratcher, ET 64, ’52/53, 93; New Docs 1, 43; JDerrett, NovT 13, ’71, 241–58 on the public transport system; cp. Lk 19:31, 34), but they record that he was addressed as ‘Lord’ (κύριε), once in Mk (7:28) and more oft. in Mt, e.g. 8:2, 6, 8, 21, 25; 9:28; 14:28, 30; 15:22, 25, 27; 16:22 (also ApcSed 12:2).—Lk refers to Jesus much more frequently as ὁ κ. (Iren. 1, prol. 2 [Harv. I 4, 5] and 5, 26, 2 [Harv. II 396, 2]): 7:13; 10:1, 39 (Ἰησοῦ P⁷⁵; τοῦ Ἰησοῦ P⁴⁵ et al.), 41; 11:39; 12:42a; 13:15; 17:5f; 18:6; 19:8 al. The voc. κύριε is also found oft.: 5:8, 12; 9:54, 61; 10:17, 40; 11:1; 12:41 al.—In J the designation ὁ κ. occurs rarely, in the first 19 chapters only in passages that are text-critically uncertain (4:1 v.l.; 6:23, with omission in some mss.) or that have been suspected on other grounds (11:2); then 20:2, 18, 20, 25; cp. vss. 13, 28; 21:7ab, 12. On the other hand, κύριε in address is extraordinarily common throughout the whole book: 4:11, 15, 19, 49; 5:7; 6:34, 68 al. (more than 30 times).—In the long ending of Mk we have the designation ὁ κ. twice, 16:19, 20. In GPt ὁ κ. occurs 1:2; 2:3ab; 3:6, 8; 4:10; 5:19; 6:21, 24; 12:50ab; 14:59, 60 (in the last pass. without the art.); the fragment that has been preserved hardly affords any opportunity for the use of the voc. 2 Cl introduces apocryphal sayings of Jesus with λέγει ὁ κ. 5:2; λ. ὁ κ. ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ 8:5.—Repeated κύριε, κύριε Mt 7:21f; Lk 6:46; 2 Cl 4:2 (TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 26 [Stone p. 20]; ApcMos 25 p. 14, 1 Tdf.; s. KKöhler, StKr 88, 1915, 471–90).

ג. Even in the passages already mentioned the use of the word κ. raises Jesus above the human level (Mani is also κ. for his people: Kephal. I 183, 11; 13; 16); this tendency becomes even clearer in the following places: ὁ κύριος Ac 5:14; 9:10f, 42; 11:23f; 22:10b; Ro 12:11; 14:8; 1 Cor 6:13f, 17; 7:10, 12; 2 Cor 5:6, 8; Gal 1:19; Col 1:10; 1 Th 4:15b; 2 Th 3:1; Hb 2:3; Js 5:7f; B 5:5; IEph 10:3; AcPl Ha 6, 21; 7, 5; 27; 8, 2; AcPlCor 1:6, 14.—Without the art. 1 Cor 4:4; 7:22b; 10:21ab; 2 Cor 12:1; 1 Th 4:15a; 2 Ti 2:24; AcPlCor 1:8. So esp. in combinations w. preps.: ἀπὸ κυρίου Col 3:24. κατὰ κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. παρὰ κυρίου Eph 6:8. πρὸς κύριον 2 Cor 3:16; AcPl Ha 6, 9. πρὸς τὸν κ. 8, 23. σὺν κυρίῳ 1 Th 4:17b. ὑπὸ κυρίου 1 Cor 7:25b; 2 Th 2:13. Esp. freq. is the Pauline formula ἐν κυρίῳ (lit. on ἐν 4c), which appears outside Paul’s letters only Rv 14:13; IPol 8:3; AcPl Ha 3, 23; AcPlCor 1:1, 16 (cp. Pol 1:1 ἐν κυρίῳ ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χριστῷ): 1 Cor 11:11; Phlm 16; πιστὸς ἐν κ. 1 Cor 4:17; cp. Eph 6:21; Hm 4, 1, 4; φῶς ἐν κ. Eph 5:8. ἡ σφραγίς μου τ. ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κ. 1 Cor 9:2. W. verbs: ἀσπάζεσθαι Ro 16:22 (GBahr, CBQ 28, ’66, 465f renders: in the service of my master, i.e. Paul); 1 Cor 16:19. ἐνδυναμοῦσθαι Eph 6:10. καλεῖσθαι 1 Cor 7:22a. καυχᾶσθαι 1:31. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12ab; μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. παραλαμβάνειν διακονίαν Col 4:17. πεποιθέναι εἴς τινα Gal 5:10. ἐπί τινα 2 Th 3:4; cp. Phil 1:14; 2:24. προί̈στασθαι 1 Th 5:12. προσδέχεσθαι Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. στήκειν 4:1; 1 Th 3:8. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν κ. 2 Cor 2:12.—W. διδάσκαλος J 13:13f. W. σωτήρ 2 Pt 3:2; cp. 1:11; 2:20 (Just., D. 39, 2). W. Χριστός Ac 2:36; cp. Χριστὸς κύριος (La 4:20; PsSol 17, 32 v.l. [GBeale, Christos Kyrios in PsSol 17:32—‘The Lord’s Anointed’ Reconsidered: NTS 31, ’85, 620–27]; PsSol 18 ins) Lk 2:11. ὁ κ. Χριστός AcPlCor 2:3. Esp. freq. are the formulas ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Ac 1:21; 4:33; 8:16; 11:20; 15:11; 16:31; 19:5, 13, 17; 20:24, 35; 21:13; 1 Cor 11:23; 16:23; 2 Cor 4:14; 11:31; Gal 6:17 v.l.; Eph 1:15; 1 Th 2:15; 4:2; 2 Th 1:7; 2:8; Phlm 5.—ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 11:17; 28:31; Ro 13:14; 2 Cor 13:13; Phil 4:23; 2 Th 3:6; Phlm 25; 1 Cl 21:6 (Ar. 15, 1). Without the art. mostly in introductions to letters Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; 6:23; Phil 1:2; 3:20; 1 Th 1:1; 2 Th 1:2, 12b; 1 Ti 5:21 v.l.; Js 1:1; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς κ. 2 Cor 4:5; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. Col 2:6. Χριστὸς ὁ κ. 2 Cl 9:5. In an appeal κύριε Ἰησοῦ (cp. Sb 8316, 5f κύριε Σάραπι; PGM 7, 331 κύριε Ἄνουβι) Ac 7:59; Rv 22:20. κύριε AcPl Ha 7:30f, 40.—W. gen. of pers. (in many places the mss. vary considerably in adding or omitting this gen.) ὁ κ. μου ISm 5:2. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 2 Ti 1:8; Hb 7:14; IPhld ins; ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Ac 20:21; 1 Cor 5:4; 2 Cor 1:14; 1 Th 2:19; 3:11, 13; 2 Th 1:8; Hb 13:20. Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1 Cor 9:1. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ro 16:18 (the only pass. in Paul without Ἰησοῦς). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 15:26; Ro 5:1, 11; 15:6, 30; 1 Cor 1:2, 7f, 10; 6:11 v.l.; 15:57; 2 Cor 1:3; 8:9; Gal 6:14, 18; Eph 1:3; 5:20; 6:24; Col 1:3; 1 Th 1:3; 5:9, 23, 28; 2 Th 2:1, 14, 16; 3:18; 1 Ti 6:3, 14; Js 2:1; 1 Pt 1:3; 2 Pt 1:8, 14, 16; Jd 4, 17, 21 (also TestSol 1:12 D). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ἰησοῦς AcPlCor 2:5; cp. AcPl Ha 8, 17=Ox 1602, 20f/BMM recto 22. Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 1:4; 5:21; 7:25; 1 Cor 1:9; Jd 25 (Just., D. 41, 4). (ὁ) Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 6:11 v.l., 23; 8:39; 1 Cor 15:31; Eph 3:11; 1 Ti 1:2, 12; 2 Ti 1:2 (ὁ ἡμέτερος κ. Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς Just., D. 32, 3 and 47, 5 al.). Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. μου Phil 3:8. ὁ κ. μου Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς AcPl Ha 7, 29. ὁ κ. αὐτῶν Rv 11:8.—W. other genitives: πάντων κ. Lord over all (cp. Pind., I. 5, 53 Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κ.; Plut., Mor. 355e Osiris; PGM 13, 202) Ac 10:36; Ro 10:12. κ. κυρίων (cp. En 9:4) Rv 17:14; 19:16.—That ‘Jesus is κύριο’ (perh. ‘our κύριος is Jesus’) is the confession of the (Pauline) Christian church: Ro 10:9; 1 Cor 12:3; cp. 8:6; Phil 2:11 (on the latter pass. s. under ἁρπαγμός and κενόω 1. Cp. also Diod S 5, 72, 1: after Zeus was raised ἐκ γῆς εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, there arose in the ψυχαῖς of all those who had experienced his benefactions, the belief ὡς ἁπάντων τῶν γινομένων κατὰ οὐρανὸν οὗτος εἴη κύριος; s. also 3, 61, 6 Zeus acclaimed ‘God and Lord’).—In J the confession takes the form ὁ κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου J 20:28 (on the combination of κύριος and θεός s. θεός, beg., and 3c).—JFitzmyer, The Semitic Background of the NT Kyrios-Title: A Wandering Aramaean—Collected Aramaic Essays ’79, 115–42; s. also 87–90.

δ. In some places it is not clear whether God or Christ is meant, cp. Ac 9:31; 1 Cor 4:19; 7:17; 2 Cor 8:21; Col 3:22b; 1 Th 4:6; 2 Th 3:16 al.

ε. of other transcendent beings

א. an angel Ac 10:4 (JosAs 14:6 al.; GrBar 4:1 al.; ApcZeph). p. 129 Denis.

ב. in contrast to the one κύριος of the Christians there are θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί many gods and many lords 1 Cor 8:5 (cp. Dt 10:17); we cannot say just what difference, if any, Paul makes betw. these θεοί and κύριοι; unless we have here an hendiadys, the apostle may imply that the κ. are of lower rank than the θ. (sim. Did., Gen. 248, 5. On the many θεοί and lesser divinities cp. Maximus Tyr. 11, 5ab θεὸς εἷς πάντων βασιλεὺς κ. πατήρ, κ. θεοὶ πολλοί, θεοῦ παῖδες [= δαίμονες 11, 12a], συνάρχοντες θεοῦ. Ταῦτα κ. ὁ Ἕλλην λέγει, κ. ὁ βάρβαρος; 8, 8ef. Also Diog. L. 8, 23 the saying of Pythagoras, that humankind must τοὺς θεοὺς δαιμόνων προτιμᾶν=honor the deities more than the divinities or demi-gods δαίμονες; Heraclitus, Fgm. 5 divides the celestial realm into θεοὶ καὶ ἥρωες. S. also κυριότης 3 and, in a way, PGM 36, 246 κύριοι ἄγγελοι; s. also θεός 1).—On the whole word s. WGraf Baudissin, Kyrios als Gottesname im Judentum u. s. Stelle in d. Religionsgesch., 4 vols. 1926–29; SvenHerner, Die Anwendung d. Wortes κ. im NT 1903; Dssm., LO 298ff [LAE 353ff]; BBacon, Jesus as Lord: HTR 4, 1911, 204–28; WHeitmüller, ZNW 13, 1912, 333ff; HBöhlig, D. Geisteskultur v. Tarsos 1913, 53ff, Zum Begriff κύριος bei Pls: ZNW 14, 1913, 23ff, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 170ff; WBousset, Kyrios Christos² 1921 [Engl. tr. JSteely ’70]; PWern-le, ZTK 25, 1915, 1–92; PAlthaus, NKZ 26, 1915, 439ff; 513ff; Heitmüller, ZTK 25, 1915, 156ff; Bousset, Jesus der Herr 1916; GVos, The Continuity of the Kyrios Title in the NT: PTR 13, 1915, 161–89, The Kyrios Christos Controversy: ibid. 15, 1917, 21–89; EWeber, Zum Gebrauch der κύριος-Bez.: NKZ 31, 1920, 254ff; ERohde, Gottesglaube u. Kyriosglaube bei Paulus: ZNW 22, 1923, 43ff; RSeeberg, D. Ursprung des Christenglaubens 1914; JWeiss, D. Urchristentum 1917, 351ff; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Burton, ICC Gal 1921, 399–404; WFoerster, Herr ist Jesus 1924; AFrövig, D. Kyriosglaube des NTs 1928; ELohmeyer, Kyr. Jesus 1928; EvDobschütz, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς: ZNW 30, ’31, 97–123 (lit.); OMichel, D. Christus des Pls: ZNW 32, ’33, 6–31; also 28, 1929, 324–33; Dodd 9–11; LCerfaux, ‘Kyrios’ dans les citations paul. de l’AT: ETL 20, ’43, 5–17; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 130–37; PÉLangevin, Jésus Seigneur ’67; IPotterie, BRigaux Festschr. ’70, 117–46 (Luke); JKingsbury, JBL 94, ’75, 246–55 (Mt); FDanker, Luke ’87, 60–81; DZeller, 925–28 (lit.).—B. 1330. Schürer II 326. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κύριος
11 λέγω

λέγω =⟩ λέχω (A),

λέγω (A),

A lay, [tense] pres. erroneously inferred from λέξομαι, ἔλεκτο, etc.; v. λέχομαι.

------------------------------------

λέγω (B),

A pick up, etc.: tenses for signf. 1 and 11, [tense] fut. λέξω Od.24.224
: [tense] aor. ἔλεξα A.Pers. 292
:—[voice] Med., [tense] fut. in pass. sense λέξομαι E. Alc. 322
: [tense] aor. ἐλεξάμην Il.21.27
(trans.); [dialect] Ep. ἐλέγμην Od.9.335
; λέκτο 4.451
:—[voice] Pass., [tense] aor. ἐλέχθην Il.3.188
: also post-Hom. in these senses, but only in compos., esp. with ἀπο-, ἐκ-, κατα-, συν-; post-Hom. [tense] pf. εἴλοχα (κατ-, συν-), [voice] Pass. εἴλεγμαι, in these senses rarely λέλεγμαι (v. the compds.); also [tense] fut. λεγήσομαι ( συλ-): [tense] aor. 2 ἐλέγην (κατ-, συν-):—gather, pick up, ὀστέα.. λέγωμεν Il.23.239
, cf. Od.24. 72, Pi.P.8.53; αἱμασιάς τε λέγων picking out stones for building walls, Od.18.359 (ubi v. Sch., cf. λογάς 2
), cf. 24.224:—[voice] Med., gather for oneself, ἐπὶ δὲ ξύλα πολλὰ λέγεσθε Il.8.507
; ὀστέα λευκὰ λέγοντο 24.793
; φάρμακα λέξασθαι A.R.3.807
.

2 [voice] Med., choose for oneself, pick out, λέξαιτο.. ἄνδρας ἀρίστους Od.24.108
; κούρους Il.21.27
:—[voice] Pass., to be chosen, εἰ.. λεγοίμεθα πάντες ἄριστοι 13.276
.

II count, tell, ἐν δ' ἡμέας λέγε κήτεσιν he counted us among the seals, Od.4.452; and in [tense] aor. [voice] Med., Il.2.125; ἐγὼ πέμπτος μετὰ τοῖσιν ἐλέγμην I reckoned myself.., Od.9.335; λέκτο δ' ἀριθμόν he told him over the number, 4.451:—[voice] Pass., μετὰ τοῖσιν ἐλέχθην I was counted among these, Il.3.188.

b so, but not freq., after Hom., λ. ποντιᾶν ψάφων ἀριθμόν Pi.O.13.46
, cf. A.Ag. 570; καθ' ἓν ἕκαστον λ. Isoc.2.45
; also καὶ σὲ δ' ἐν τούτοις λέγω count you among.., A.Pr. 973; λ. τινὰ οὐδαμοῦ count him as naught, S.Ant. 183; κέρδος λ., εἰ .. count it gain, that.., ib. 462:—[voice] Med., λέξατο πάντας [ναύτας] Pi.P.4.189:—[voice] Pass., λέγεσθαι ἐν τοῖς ἱππικωτάτοις X.Oec.11.20
; ἐνὶ πρώτῃσι λέγεσθαι Call.Del.16
: [tense] fut. [voice] Med. in pass. sense, ἐν τοῖς οὐκέτ' οὖσι λέξομαι E.
l.c.

2 recount, tell over, οὔ τι διαπρήξαιμι λέγων ἐμὰ κήδεα Od.14.197
; σὺ δέ μοι λέγε θέσκελα ἔργα 11.374
; τὰ ἕκαστα λέγων 12.165
; ὅσα τ' αὐτὸς.. ἐμόγησε, πάντ' ἔλεγ' 23.308: so in Trag., λ. τύχας, πάθη, μόχθους, etc., A.Pr. 633, Pers. 292, Ag. 555, etc.; also Ἀγαμέμνονι.. λέγ' ὀνείδεα repeated reproaches against him, Il.2.222; so perh. ψεύδεα πολλὰ λ. Hes.Th.27
(but v. infr. 111):—[voice] Med., τί σε χρὴ ταῦτα λέγεσθαι; why need'st thou tell the tale thereof? Il.13.275; and so, μηκέτι ταῦτα λεγώμεθα νηπύτιοι ὥς ib. 292, cf. Od.3.240, 13.296; μηκέτι νῦν δήθ' αὖθι λεγώμεθα Il.2.435
.

III say, speak, first in Hes.Th.27 (v. supr.11.2): [tense] fut. λέξω Emp.38.1
, A.Ag. 859, Hdt.4.14, Th.2.48, Antipho 6.33, etc.: [tense] aor. ἔλεξα Anacr.45
, Pl.Sph. 217e, Antipho 1.15 (rare in Pl. and the Orators, common in some dialects, as Boeotian, IG7.504.2 ([place name] Tanagra), Thessalian, ib.9(2).461.21, Ionic, v.l. in Hp.Aër. 12): [tense] pf. λέλεχα Gal.16.249
, λέλεγα and λέλογας Hsch.
( εἴρηκα in correct writers):—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. λεχθήσομαι Th.5.86
, Pl.Ti. 67c, etc.: also [tense] fut. [voice] Med. in pass. sense, S.OC 1186, E.Hec. 906 (lyr.), etc.; and λελέξομαι Th.3.53
(v.l. λέξεται), Pl.R. 457b: [tense] aor. ἐλέχθην (never ἐλέγην in this sense) S.OT 1442, Th.6.32, etc.: [tense] pf. λέλεγμαι Pi.N.8.20
, Hdt.2.21, S.Ph. 389, etc. ( εἴλεγμαι in this sense only in compd. δι-): rare in compds. (only ἀντιλέγω, ἐπιλέγω, καταλέγω, προλέγω), the [tense] pres. in most compds. being supplied by ἀγορεύω, the [tense] fut. by ἐρῶ, the [tense] aor. by εἶπον, the [tense] pf. by εἴρηκα:

1 say, speak, never in Hom., first in Hes. l.c., freq. from Hdt. and Trag. downwds.; of all kinds of oral communications, ἐκέλευε λέγειν εἴ τι θέλοι Hdt.8.58
; so λέγοις ἄν speak, say on, Pl.Plt. 268e, etc.; λ. μῦθον A.Pers. 698
(troch.); ψευδῆ λ. Id.Ag. 625
; ἀληθῆ λ. Pl.Phlb. 12b
(so in [voice] Pass., λόγος λέλεκται πᾶς S.Ph. 389
); of oracles, say, declare, Hdt.8.136; ὥσπερ τοὔνομα λέγει indicates, Pl. Prt. 312c: with Preps., λ. ἀμφί τινος A.Th. 1017
, E.Hec. 580; περί τινος Xenoph.34.2
, Democr.165, S.Aj. 151 (anap.), Th.2.48; ὑπέρ τινος in his defence, S.El. 555, X.HG1.7.16; κατά τινος against him, Thgn.1240a, X.HG1.5.2; λ. ἐπί τισι εὐχὰς ἀγαθάς express good wishes for them, A.Supp. 625 (anap.); λ. τά τινος take his part, D.8.64; λ. πρός τι in reference or in answer to.., S.Ant. 753, etc.; εἴς τι X.Mem. 1.5.1
.

2 c. acc. et inf., say that.., Pi.P.2.59, etc.: with neg. οὐ, Pl.R. 348c, etc., but μή ib. 346e, X.Smp.4.5 ([voice] Pass.), and usu. in later Gr., LXX Ge.38.22; λ. μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν Ev.Matt.22.23
: freq. also folld. by ὡς, ὅτι (generally so in the [voice] Act. voice) when the subject of the relative clause may become the object of the principal Verb, γυναῖκα λέγουσιν, ὡς κάθηται .. X.Cyr.7.3.5, etc.: rarely c. part., λ. Οἰδίπουν ὀλωλότα speak of him as dead, S.OC 1580; λέγουσιν ἡμᾶς ὡς ὀλωλότας A.Ag. 672
; λέξασ' ἀδελφῷ σ' ἐνθάδ' ὄντα E.Hel. 888
:—[voice] Pass., λέξεται ἔχων Id.IT 1047
, cf. A.Ag. 170 (cj.).

3 λέγειν τινά τι say something of another, esp. κακὰ λ. τινά speak ill of him, revile him, Hdt.8.61; ἀγαθὰ λ. τινάς Ar.Ec. 435
; τὰ ἔσχατα, τὰ ἀπόρρητα λ. ἀλλήλους, X.Mem.2.2.9, D.18.123; also εὖ or κακῶς λ. τινά, A.Ag. 445 (lyr.), S.El. 524, cf. 1028; εὖ λ. τὸν εὖ λέγοντα X.Mem.2.3.8
.

4 call by name, ἃς τρέμομεν λ. S.OC 128
(lyr.): c. dupl. acc., call so and so, λέγοιμ' ἂν ἄνδρα τόνδε τῶν σταθμῶν κύνα A.Ag. 896
, cf. S.OC 939 codd., Hdt.1.32, etc.

5 λ. τινὰ ποιεῖν τι tell, command one to do, A.Ch. 553, S.Ph. 101, X.Cyr.4.1.22, etc.: so with τινι, S.OC 840, D.19.150 (no obj. expressed in A.Ag. 925, S.OC 856); λέγε τὸν ἐρωτῶντα ἵνα.. εἴπῃ σοι .. Astramps.Orac.p.1 H.; ὡς ὁ νόμος λέγει D.22.20
; ὁ λέγων μὴ μοιχεύειν Ep.Rom.2.22
.

6 λ. τι say something, i.e. speak to the point or purpose, βούλῃ λέγειν τι, καὶ λέγων μηδὲν κλύειν; S.Ant. 757; λέγω τι; am I right? the answer being λέγεις, Id.OT 1475; κινδυνεύεις τι λέγειν Pl.Cra. 404a
; ἴσως ἄν τι λέγοις X.Mem.2.1.12
, cf. Cyr.1.4.20; opp. οὐδὲν λέγει has no meaning, no authority, οὐδὲν λ. τὸ σωφρόνως τραφῆναι Ar.Eq. 334
, cf. V.75; οὐδὲν λέγεις nonsense! Id.Th. 625; but οὐδὲν λέγειν, also, say what is not, lie, Id.Av.66, Pl. Ap. 30b; also εὖ γε λέγεις, εὖ λέγεις, εὖ ἂν λέγοις, good news!, that is well!, ib. 24e, Grg. 447b, Prt. 310b; καλῶς, ὀρθῶς λ., you are right, X. Mem.3.3.4, 3.6.8; κοὔπω λέγω and what is more, Herod.7.44; τί λέγεις; τὸν ἔποπα παῖ καλεῖς; Ar.Av.57, cf. Ec. 298 (lyr.).

7 pleon., ἔφη λέγων Hdt.3.156
, 5.36; ἔλεγε φάς Id.1.122
; ἔφασκε λέγων Ar.Av. 472
; ἦ δ' ὃς λέγων Id.V. 795
; ὡς ἔφη λέγων S.Aj. 757
; καὶ λέγων εἶπεν οὕτω πως D.8.74
, etc.

8 at the beginning of letters or documents, Ἄμασις Πολυκράτεϊ ὧδε λέγει.., Μαρδόνιος τάδε λέγει .., etc., Hdt.3.40, 8.140. ά, etc.; τὰ γράμματα ἔλεγε τάδε Id.1.124
, etc.; γράμμασι λέγον τάδε, of an inscription, Th.6.54: in roman edicts, Μάρκος Μέττιος Ῥοῦφος.. λέγει POxy. 237 viii 28
(i A.D.).

9 wish to say, mean, οὔτοι γυναῖκας ἀλλὰ Γοργόνας λέγω A.Eu.48
; τί τοῦτο λέγει, πρὸ Πύλοιο; what does
πρὸ Πύλοιο
mean? Ar.Eq. 1059
, cf. 1021, 1375, Ec. 989, Pl. Phd. 60e: freq. in Platonic dialogue, πῶς λέγεις; how do you mean? in what sense do you say this? Ap. 24e, al.; ἢ πῶς λέγομεν; or what do we mean to say? Grg. 480b; πῶς δὴ οὖν αὐτὸ λέγεις; Phdr. 265c; ποῖόν τί ποτε ἄρα λέγοντ ές φασι .. what they can possibly mean by saying.., Tht. 181c, al.: c. dupl. acc., τοιοῦτόν τι σὲ λέγειν τὸ κρεῖττον Grg. 489d
, al.: freq. (esp. in Trag.) to explain more fully, εἴσω κομίζου καὶ σύ, Κασάνδραν λέγω you, I mean Cassandra, A.Ag. 1035; ὁ μάντις, υἱὸν Οἰκλέους λ. Id.Th. 609
, cf. 658 (v.l.), Pr. 946; ποταμός, Ἀχελῷον λέγω S.Tr.9
, cf. 1220, Ph. 1261, E.Ph. 987; ἐμὲ λέγων meaning me, Isoc.12.215; τὸ δ' ὑμεῖς ὅταν λέγω, τὴν πόλιν λ. D.18.88
: sts., however, the word after λέγω is put in appos. with the word to be expld., Ἀντικλείας.., τῆς σῆς λέγω τοι μητρός A.Fr. 175
, cf. Th. 658 cod. M; περὶ τῶνδε.., λέγω δὲ Φωκέων D.19.152
; παρ' ὧν.., τούτων τῶν τὴν Ἀσίαν οἰκούντων λέγω Id.8.24
, cf. Pl.Smp. 202b: abs., μηδενὸς ὄντος ἐν [τῇ χώρᾳ] λέγω D.1.27
.

b περὶ ἃς (sc. ἀπολαύσεις) λέγομεν τὸν σώφρονα in regard to which we use the term 'temperate', Arist.EN 1148a5, cf. Pl.Grg. 494b.

10 ὡς λέγουσι as they say, S.Ant.23, etc.; ὡς λ. μοι Id.OC 1161
:—[voice] Pass., λέγεται it is said, c.acc.et inf., X.Mem.1.2.30, al.; but also πατρὸς λέγεται γενέσθαι .. Id.Cyr.1.2.1; θανεῖν ἐλέχθη he was said to have been killed, S.OT 292; so λεγόμενον ἐρέω Pi.P.5.108
: τὸ λεγόμενον abs., as the saying goes, Th.7.68, cf. Pl.Grg. 447a, Smp. 217e, etc.; τὸ λ. δὴ τοῦτο Id.Grg. 514e
: ὁ λεγόμενος γραῶν ὕθλος the so-called.., Id.Tht. 176b; οἱ λ. αὐτόνομοι εἶναι X.HG6.3.8
; οἱ λ. ὅτι .. of whom it is said that.., Id.Cyr.8.6.16.

11 of orators, speak (emphatically), λέγειν δεινός S.OT 545
, X.Cyr.1.5.9, etc.; λέγειν ἠσκηκότες S.Fr. 963
, cf. Eup.95 (v. λαλέω) ; λ. τε καὶ πράσσειν δυνατώτατος Th.1.139
; οἱ ἐν τῷ πλήθει λέγειν δυνάμενοι Isoc.3.8
, cf. D.19.286; plead one's cause in a court of law, Id.23.78; δίκας λέγειν ὑπέρ τινος speak as an advocate for.., Din.1.111.

12 boast of, tell of, τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ῥώμην X.Cyr.1.3.10
; in Poets, sing of, θέλω λ. Ἀτρείδας Anacreont.23.1
.

13 recite what is written, λαβὲ τὸ βιβλίον καὶ λέγε Pl.Tht. 143c
; and freq. in Oratt., as λέγε τὸν νόμον D.21.8
and 10, etc.; of lectures, ἀκούσατέ μου σχόλια λέγοντος Arr.Epict.3.21.6
, cf. 15.8 (the sense of Lat. lego, read, occurs only in the compds. ἀναλέγομαι, ἐπιλέγομαι).

14 say or send word by another, X.An.1.9.25, 7.4.5.

15 maintain as a thesis, οἱ τὰς ἰδέας λέγοντες Arist. Ph. 193b36
, Metaph. 1036b14.

16 nominate, Lat. dicere [dictatorem], D.C.Fr.36.26 ([voice] Pass.). (Cf. Lat. lègo, legio, legulus ('olivegatherer').)

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > λέγω
12 λέχω

λέγω =⟩ λέχω (A),

λέγω (A),

A lay, [tense] pres. erroneously inferred from λέξομαι, ἔλεκτο, etc.; v. λέχομαι.

------------------------------------

λέγω (B),

A pick up, etc.: tenses for signf. 1 and 11, [tense] fut. λέξω Od.24.224
: [tense] aor. ἔλεξα A.Pers. 292
:—[voice] Med., [tense] fut. in pass. sense λέξομαι E. Alc. 322
: [tense] aor. ἐλεξάμην Il.21.27
(trans.); [dialect] Ep. ἐλέγμην Od.9.335
; λέκτο 4.451
:—[voice] Pass., [tense] aor. ἐλέχθην Il.3.188
: also post-Hom. in these senses, but only in compos., esp. with ἀπο-, ἐκ-, κατα-, συν-; post-Hom. [tense] pf. εἴλοχα (κατ-, συν-), [voice] Pass. εἴλεγμαι, in these senses rarely λέλεγμαι (v. the compds.); also [tense] fut. λεγήσομαι ( συλ-): [tense] aor. 2 ἐλέγην (κατ-, συν-):—gather, pick up, ὀστέα.. λέγωμεν Il.23.239
, cf. Od.24. 72, Pi.P.8.53; αἱμασιάς τε λέγων picking out stones for building walls, Od.18.359 (ubi v. Sch., cf. λογάς 2
), cf. 24.224:—[voice] Med., gather for oneself, ἐπὶ δὲ ξύλα πολλὰ λέγεσθε Il.8.507
; ὀστέα λευκὰ λέγοντο 24.793
; φάρμακα λέξασθαι A.R.3.807
.

2 [voice] Med., choose for oneself, pick out, λέξαιτο.. ἄνδρας ἀρίστους Od.24.108
; κούρους Il.21.27
:—[voice] Pass., to be chosen, εἰ.. λεγοίμεθα πάντες ἄριστοι 13.276
.

II count, tell, ἐν δ' ἡμέας λέγε κήτεσιν he counted us among the seals, Od.4.452; and in [tense] aor. [voice] Med., Il.2.125; ἐγὼ πέμπτος μετὰ τοῖσιν ἐλέγμην I reckoned myself.., Od.9.335; λέκτο δ' ἀριθμόν he told him over the number, 4.451:—[voice] Pass., μετὰ τοῖσιν ἐλέχθην I was counted among these, Il.3.188.

b so, but not freq., after Hom., λ. ποντιᾶν ψάφων ἀριθμόν Pi.O.13.46
, cf. A.Ag. 570; καθ' ἓν ἕκαστον λ. Isoc.2.45
; also καὶ σὲ δ' ἐν τούτοις λέγω count you among.., A.Pr. 973; λ. τινὰ οὐδαμοῦ count him as naught, S.Ant. 183; κέρδος λ., εἰ .. count it gain, that.., ib. 462:—[voice] Med., λέξατο πάντας [ναύτας] Pi.P.4.189:—[voice] Pass., λέγεσθαι ἐν τοῖς ἱππικωτάτοις X.Oec.11.20
; ἐνὶ πρώτῃσι λέγεσθαι Call.Del.16
: [tense] fut. [voice] Med. in pass. sense, ἐν τοῖς οὐκέτ' οὖσι λέξομαι E.
l.c.

2 recount, tell over, οὔ τι διαπρήξαιμι λέγων ἐμὰ κήδεα Od.14.197
; σὺ δέ μοι λέγε θέσκελα ἔργα 11.374
; τὰ ἕκαστα λέγων 12.165
; ὅσα τ' αὐτὸς.. ἐμόγησε, πάντ' ἔλεγ' 23.308: so in Trag., λ. τύχας, πάθη, μόχθους, etc., A.Pr. 633, Pers. 292, Ag. 555, etc.; also Ἀγαμέμνονι.. λέγ' ὀνείδεα repeated reproaches against him, Il.2.222; so perh. ψεύδεα πολλὰ λ. Hes.Th.27
(but v. infr. 111):—[voice] Med., τί σε χρὴ ταῦτα λέγεσθαι; why need'st thou tell the tale thereof? Il.13.275; and so, μηκέτι ταῦτα λεγώμεθα νηπύτιοι ὥς ib. 292, cf. Od.3.240, 13.296; μηκέτι νῦν δήθ' αὖθι λεγώμεθα Il.2.435
.

III say, speak, first in Hes.Th.27 (v. supr.11.2): [tense] fut. λέξω Emp.38.1
, A.Ag. 859, Hdt.4.14, Th.2.48, Antipho 6.33, etc.: [tense] aor. ἔλεξα Anacr.45
, Pl.Sph. 217e, Antipho 1.15 (rare in Pl. and the Orators, common in some dialects, as Boeotian, IG7.504.2 ([place name] Tanagra), Thessalian, ib.9(2).461.21, Ionic, v.l. in Hp.Aër. 12): [tense] pf. λέλεχα Gal.16.249
, λέλεγα and λέλογας Hsch.
( εἴρηκα in correct writers):—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. λεχθήσομαι Th.5.86
, Pl.Ti. 67c, etc.: also [tense] fut. [voice] Med. in pass. sense, S.OC 1186, E.Hec. 906 (lyr.), etc.; and λελέξομαι Th.3.53
(v.l. λέξεται), Pl.R. 457b: [tense] aor. ἐλέχθην (never ἐλέγην in this sense) S.OT 1442, Th.6.32, etc.: [tense] pf. λέλεγμαι Pi.N.8.20
, Hdt.2.21, S.Ph. 389, etc. ( εἴλεγμαι in this sense only in compd. δι-): rare in compds. (only ἀντιλέγω, ἐπιλέγω, καταλέγω, προλέγω), the [tense] pres. in most compds. being supplied by ἀγορεύω, the [tense] fut. by ἐρῶ, the [tense] aor. by εἶπον, the [tense] pf. by εἴρηκα:

1 say, speak, never in Hom., first in Hes. l.c., freq. from Hdt. and Trag. downwds.; of all kinds of oral communications, ἐκέλευε λέγειν εἴ τι θέλοι Hdt.8.58
; so λέγοις ἄν speak, say on, Pl.Plt. 268e, etc.; λ. μῦθον A.Pers. 698
(troch.); ψευδῆ λ. Id.Ag. 625
; ἀληθῆ λ. Pl.Phlb. 12b
(so in [voice] Pass., λόγος λέλεκται πᾶς S.Ph. 389
); of oracles, say, declare, Hdt.8.136; ὥσπερ τοὔνομα λέγει indicates, Pl. Prt. 312c: with Preps., λ. ἀμφί τινος A.Th. 1017
, E.Hec. 580; περί τινος Xenoph.34.2
, Democr.165, S.Aj. 151 (anap.), Th.2.48; ὑπέρ τινος in his defence, S.El. 555, X.HG1.7.16; κατά τινος against him, Thgn.1240a, X.HG1.5.2; λ. ἐπί τισι εὐχὰς ἀγαθάς express good wishes for them, A.Supp. 625 (anap.); λ. τά τινος take his part, D.8.64; λ. πρός τι in reference or in answer to.., S.Ant. 753, etc.; εἴς τι X.Mem. 1.5.1
.

2 c. acc. et inf., say that.., Pi.P.2.59, etc.: with neg. οὐ, Pl.R. 348c, etc., but μή ib. 346e, X.Smp.4.5 ([voice] Pass.), and usu. in later Gr., LXX Ge.38.22; λ. μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν Ev.Matt.22.23
: freq. also folld. by ὡς, ὅτι (generally so in the [voice] Act. voice) when the subject of the relative clause may become the object of the principal Verb, γυναῖκα λέγουσιν, ὡς κάθηται .. X.Cyr.7.3.5, etc.: rarely c. part., λ. Οἰδίπουν ὀλωλότα speak of him as dead, S.OC 1580; λέγουσιν ἡμᾶς ὡς ὀλωλότας A.Ag. 672
; λέξασ' ἀδελφῷ σ' ἐνθάδ' ὄντα E.Hel. 888
:—[voice] Pass., λέξεται ἔχων Id.IT 1047
, cf. A.Ag. 170 (cj.).

3 λέγειν τινά τι say something of another, esp. κακὰ λ. τινά speak ill of him, revile him, Hdt.8.61; ἀγαθὰ λ. τινάς Ar.Ec. 435
; τὰ ἔσχατα, τὰ ἀπόρρητα λ. ἀλλήλους, X.Mem.2.2.9, D.18.123; also εὖ or κακῶς λ. τινά, A.Ag. 445 (lyr.), S.El. 524, cf. 1028; εὖ λ. τὸν εὖ λέγοντα X.Mem.2.3.8
.

4 call by name, ἃς τρέμομεν λ. S.OC 128
(lyr.): c. dupl. acc., call so and so, λέγοιμ' ἂν ἄνδρα τόνδε τῶν σταθμῶν κύνα A.Ag. 896
, cf. S.OC 939 codd., Hdt.1.32, etc.

5 λ. τινὰ ποιεῖν τι tell, command one to do, A.Ch. 553, S.Ph. 101, X.Cyr.4.1.22, etc.: so with τινι, S.OC 840, D.19.150 (no obj. expressed in A.Ag. 925, S.OC 856); λέγε τὸν ἐρωτῶντα ἵνα.. εἴπῃ σοι .. Astramps.Orac.p.1 H.; ὡς ὁ νόμος λέγει D.22.20
; ὁ λέγων μὴ μοιχεύειν Ep.Rom.2.22
.

6 λ. τι say something, i.e. speak to the point or purpose, βούλῃ λέγειν τι, καὶ λέγων μηδὲν κλύειν; S.Ant. 757; λέγω τι; am I right? the answer being λέγεις, Id.OT 1475; κινδυνεύεις τι λέγειν Pl.Cra. 404a
; ἴσως ἄν τι λέγοις X.Mem.2.1.12
, cf. Cyr.1.4.20; opp. οὐδὲν λέγει has no meaning, no authority, οὐδὲν λ. τὸ σωφρόνως τραφῆναι Ar.Eq. 334
, cf. V.75; οὐδὲν λέγεις nonsense! Id.Th. 625; but οὐδὲν λέγειν, also, say what is not, lie, Id.Av.66, Pl. Ap. 30b; also εὖ γε λέγεις, εὖ λέγεις, εὖ ἂν λέγοις, good news!, that is well!, ib. 24e, Grg. 447b, Prt. 310b; καλῶς, ὀρθῶς λ., you are right, X. Mem.3.3.4, 3.6.8; κοὔπω λέγω and what is more, Herod.7.44; τί λέγεις; τὸν ἔποπα παῖ καλεῖς; Ar.Av.57, cf. Ec. 298 (lyr.).

7 pleon., ἔφη λέγων Hdt.3.156
, 5.36; ἔλεγε φάς Id.1.122
; ἔφασκε λέγων Ar.Av. 472
; ἦ δ' ὃς λέγων Id.V. 795
; ὡς ἔφη λέγων S.Aj. 757
; καὶ λέγων εἶπεν οὕτω πως D.8.74
, etc.

8 at the beginning of letters or documents, Ἄμασις Πολυκράτεϊ ὧδε λέγει.., Μαρδόνιος τάδε λέγει .., etc., Hdt.3.40, 8.140. ά, etc.; τὰ γράμματα ἔλεγε τάδε Id.1.124
, etc.; γράμμασι λέγον τάδε, of an inscription, Th.6.54: in roman edicts, Μάρκος Μέττιος Ῥοῦφος.. λέγει POxy. 237 viii 28
(i A.D.).

9 wish to say, mean, οὔτοι γυναῖκας ἀλλὰ Γοργόνας λέγω A.Eu.48
; τί τοῦτο λέγει, πρὸ Πύλοιο; what does
πρὸ Πύλοιο
mean? Ar.Eq. 1059
, cf. 1021, 1375, Ec. 989, Pl. Phd. 60e: freq. in Platonic dialogue, πῶς λέγεις; how do you mean? in what sense do you say this? Ap. 24e, al.; ἢ πῶς λέγομεν; or what do we mean to say? Grg. 480b; πῶς δὴ οὖν αὐτὸ λέγεις; Phdr. 265c; ποῖόν τί ποτε ἄρα λέγοντ ές φασι .. what they can possibly mean by saying.., Tht. 181c, al.: c. dupl. acc., τοιοῦτόν τι σὲ λέγειν τὸ κρεῖττον Grg. 489d
, al.: freq. (esp. in Trag.) to explain more fully, εἴσω κομίζου καὶ σύ, Κασάνδραν λέγω you, I mean Cassandra, A.Ag. 1035; ὁ μάντις, υἱὸν Οἰκλέους λ. Id.Th. 609
, cf. 658 (v.l.), Pr. 946; ποταμός, Ἀχελῷον λέγω S.Tr.9
, cf. 1220, Ph. 1261, E.Ph. 987; ἐμὲ λέγων meaning me, Isoc.12.215; τὸ δ' ὑμεῖς ὅταν λέγω, τὴν πόλιν λ. D.18.88
: sts., however, the word after λέγω is put in appos. with the word to be expld., Ἀντικλείας.., τῆς σῆς λέγω τοι μητρός A.Fr. 175
, cf. Th. 658 cod. M; περὶ τῶνδε.., λέγω δὲ Φωκέων D.19.152
; παρ' ὧν.., τούτων τῶν τὴν Ἀσίαν οἰκούντων λέγω Id.8.24
, cf. Pl.Smp. 202b: abs., μηδενὸς ὄντος ἐν [τῇ χώρᾳ] λέγω D.1.27
.

b περὶ ἃς (sc. ἀπολαύσεις) λέγομεν τὸν σώφρονα in regard to which we use the term 'temperate', Arist.EN 1148a5, cf. Pl.Grg. 494b.

10 ὡς λέγουσι as they say, S.Ant.23, etc.; ὡς λ. μοι Id.OC 1161
:—[voice] Pass., λέγεται it is said, c.acc.et inf., X.Mem.1.2.30, al.; but also πατρὸς λέγεται γενέσθαι .. Id.Cyr.1.2.1; θανεῖν ἐλέχθη he was said to have been killed, S.OT 292; so λεγόμενον ἐρέω Pi.P.5.108
: τὸ λεγόμενον abs., as the saying goes, Th.7.68, cf. Pl.Grg. 447a, Smp. 217e, etc.; τὸ λ. δὴ τοῦτο Id.Grg. 514e
: ὁ λεγόμενος γραῶν ὕθλος the so-called.., Id.Tht. 176b; οἱ λ. αὐτόνομοι εἶναι X.HG6.3.8
; οἱ λ. ὅτι .. of whom it is said that.., Id.Cyr.8.6.16.

11 of orators, speak (emphatically), λέγειν δεινός S.OT 545
, X.Cyr.1.5.9, etc.; λέγειν ἠσκηκότες S.Fr. 963
, cf. Eup.95 (v. λαλέω) ; λ. τε καὶ πράσσειν δυνατώτατος Th.1.139
; οἱ ἐν τῷ πλήθει λέγειν δυνάμενοι Isoc.3.8
, cf. D.19.286; plead one's cause in a court of law, Id.23.78; δίκας λέγειν ὑπέρ τινος speak as an advocate for.., Din.1.111.

12 boast of, tell of, τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ῥώμην X.Cyr.1.3.10
; in Poets, sing of, θέλω λ. Ἀτρείδας Anacreont.23.1
.

13 recite what is written, λαβὲ τὸ βιβλίον καὶ λέγε Pl.Tht. 143c
; and freq. in Oratt., as λέγε τὸν νόμον D.21.8
and 10, etc.; of lectures, ἀκούσατέ μου σχόλια λέγοντος Arr.Epict.3.21.6
, cf. 15.8 (the sense of Lat. lego, read, occurs only in the compds. ἀναλέγομαι, ἐπιλέγομαι).

14 say or send word by another, X.An.1.9.25, 7.4.5.

15 maintain as a thesis, οἱ τὰς ἰδέας λέγοντες Arist. Ph. 193b36
, Metaph. 1036b14.

16 nominate, Lat. dicere [dictatorem], D.C.Fr.36.26 ([voice] Pass.). (Cf. Lat. lègo, legio, legulus ('olivegatherer').)

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > λέχω
13 ὁ

ὁ, ἡ, τό, epic forms, gen. τοῖο, du. τοῖιν, pl. τοί, ταί, gen. τάων, dat. τοῖσι, τῆς(ι): (1) as demonstrative pronoun, that, those, often merely an emphatic he, she, it, pl. they, them; οὐδὲ παλαιῶν ( γυναικῶν), | τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν, ‘those ancient,’ Od. 2.119; the emphatic after-position being common when the word is adjectival, cf. Il. 5.320, 332; the pron. is often foll. by a name in apposition, αὐτὰρ ὃ μήνιε.. Ἀχιλλεύς, ‘he, namely Achilles,’ Il. 1.488 ; ἣ δ' ἕσπετο Παλλὰς Ἀθήνη, Od. 1.125; freq. ὃ μὲν.. ὃ δέ, τὸ μὲν.. τὸ δέ, etc., the one.. the other, this.. that, etc. The word should be accented when used as a demonstrative.— (2) as definite article, the, a use denied by some to Homer, but the sense imperatively demands the later weakened force in many passages, and does not admit the stronger, Αἴᾶς δ' ὁ μέγας, Il. 16.358; αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον, Il. 8.342; τά τ ἐόντα τά τ ἐσσόμενα, Il. 1.70, and oftenest w. adjectives.— (3) as relative pronoun, who, which, esp., but not exclusively, the forms beginning with τ. The masc. sing. as rel. occurs, Il. 16.835, Il. 21.59, , Od. 1.254, Od. 2.262, Od. 4.777; πατρὸς, ὅ σ' ἔτρεφε τυτθὸν ἐόντα, Od. 11.67. τέ is often appended to the word when used relatively, ταί τε, ὅ τε, Od. 12.40.—For ὅ γε, see ὅγε.

A Homeric dictionary (Greek-English) (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ομηρικό λεξικό) > ὁ
14 ἡ

ὁ, ἡ, τό, epic forms, gen. τοῖο, du. τοῖιν, pl. τοί, ταί, gen. τάων, dat. τοῖσι, τῆς(ι): (1) as demonstrative pronoun, that, those, often merely an emphatic he, she, it, pl. they, them; οὐδὲ παλαιῶν ( γυναικῶν), | τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν, ‘those ancient,’ Od. 2.119; the emphatic after-position being common when the word is adjectival, cf. Il. 5.320, 332; the pron. is often foll. by a name in apposition, αὐτὰρ ὃ μήνιε.. Ἀχιλλεύς, ‘he, namely Achilles,’ Il. 1.488 ; ἣ δ' ἕσπετο Παλλὰς Ἀθήνη, Od. 1.125; freq. ὃ μὲν.. ὃ δέ, τὸ μὲν.. τὸ δέ, etc., the one.. the other, this.. that, etc. The word should be accented when used as a demonstrative.— (2) as definite article, the, a use denied by some to Homer, but the sense imperatively demands the later weakened force in many passages, and does not admit the stronger, Αἴᾶς δ' ὁ μέγας, Il. 16.358; αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον, Il. 8.342; τά τ ἐόντα τά τ ἐσσόμενα, Il. 1.70, and oftenest w. adjectives.— (3) as relative pronoun, who, which, esp., but not exclusively, the forms beginning with τ. The masc. sing. as rel. occurs, Il. 16.835, Il. 21.59, , Od. 1.254, Od. 2.262, Od. 4.777; πατρὸς, ὅ σ' ἔτρεφε τυτθὸν ἐόντα, Od. 11.67. τέ is often appended to the word when used relatively, ταί τε, ὅ τε, Od. 12.40.—For ὅ γε, see ὅγε.

A Homeric dictionary (Greek-English) (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ομηρικό λεξικό) > ἡ
15 τό

ὁ, ἡ, τό, epic forms, gen. τοῖο, du. τοῖιν, pl. τοί, ταί, gen. τάων, dat. τοῖσι, τῆς(ι): (1) as demonstrative pronoun, that, those, often merely an emphatic he, she, it, pl. they, them; οὐδὲ παλαιῶν ( γυναικῶν), | τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν, ‘those ancient,’ Od. 2.119; the emphatic after-position being common when the word is adjectival, cf. Il. 5.320, 332; the pron. is often foll. by a name in apposition, αὐτὰρ ὃ μήνιε.. Ἀχιλλεύς, ‘he, namely Achilles,’ Il. 1.488 ; ἣ δ' ἕσπετο Παλλὰς Ἀθήνη, Od. 1.125; freq. ὃ μὲν.. ὃ δέ, τὸ μὲν.. τὸ δέ, etc., the one.. the other, this.. that, etc. The word should be accented when used as a demonstrative.— (2) as definite article, the, a use denied by some to Homer, but the sense imperatively demands the later weakened force in many passages, and does not admit the stronger, Αἴᾶς δ' ὁ μέγας, Il. 16.358; αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον, Il. 8.342; τά τ ἐόντα τά τ ἐσσόμενα, Il. 1.70, and oftenest w. adjectives.— (3) as relative pronoun, who, which, esp., but not exclusively, the forms beginning with τ. The masc. sing. as rel. occurs, Il. 16.835, Il. 21.59, , Od. 1.254, Od. 2.262, Od. 4.777; πατρὸς, ὅ σ' ἔτρεφε τυτθὸν ἐόντα, Od. 11.67. τέ is often appended to the word when used relatively, ταί τε, ὅ τε, Od. 12.40.—For ὅ γε, see ὅγε.

A Homeric dictionary (Greek-English) (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ομηρικό λεξικό) > τό
16 ὅμως

ὅμως adversative particle (ὁμός ‘common’; Hom.+; Schwyzer II 582f) all the same, nevertheless, yet strengthened ὅμ. μέντοι (s. μέντοι 2) J 12:42.—Paul’s two-fold epistolary use of the word is peculiar, yet analogous to J’s use: ὅμως τὰ ἄψυχα φωνὴν διδόντα … ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ, πῶς γνωσθήσεται … 1 Cor 14:7 and ὅμως ἀνθρώπου κεκυρωμένην διαθήκην οὐδεὶς ἀθετεῖ Gal 3:15. As a rule these passages are explained on the basis of hyperbation or displacement of ὅμως, retaining the mng. ‘nevertheless’; so for Gal 3:15 the transl. would be ‘even though it involves only a person’s last will and testament, nevertheless no one annuls it’ (so, gener., EBurton, ICC, Gal 1920, 178f; cp. passages like X., Cyr. 5, l, 26 [Kühner-G. II 85f]). But since ὁμ. introduces a comparison both times in Paul (οὕτως follows it in 1 Cor 14:9), we do better (with B-D-F §450, 2) to understand ὅμ. as influenced by the older ὁμῶς ‘equally, likewise’ (cp. the ambivalent use Od. 11, 565). The transl. would be greatly simplified, and we can render ὅμ. simply likewise, also (JJeremias, ZNW 52, ’61, 127f agrees).—DELG s.v. ὁμό. M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὅμως
17 ἀπό

ἀπό, [dialect] Aeol., Thess., Arc., Cypr. [full] ἀπύ Sapph.44, cf. 78, Alc.33, Theoc.28.16,IG12(2).6.45 (Mytil.), ἀπυδόμεναι ib.9(2).594 ([place name] Larissa), 5(2).6 ([place name] Tegea), etc.:—Prep. usually with Gen. but v. infr. B. (Cf. Skt.

A ápa, Lat. ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Goth. af, OE. af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ ᾰπο?ἀπόX: where ἀπο ¯ is found in [dialect] Ep. before v or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν Il.6.62
, ἀπὸ νευρῆς 11.664
, Hes. Sc. 409) ἀπαί was sometimes written in later texts, cf. Eust. 625.11:— [pron. full] ᾱ metri gr. in [dialect] Ep. compds., such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]

I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in Hom. the prevailing sense:

1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων Il.2.208
; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν ib.24.492; ἀπ' οὐρανόθεν 8.365
(later with Advbs., ἀπὸ ἔμπροσθεν LXX Ec.1.10
, etc.); strengthd., ἐκτὸς ἀ. κλισιης Il.10.151
; also ἀπ' αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, ib.24.725; opp. ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ' ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν X.Mem.2.7.2
; similarly of the cause or ground, ἐξ ὧν προηγώνισθε καὶ ἀφ' ὧν εἰκάζω Th.4.126
:— freq. of warriors fighting from chariots, etc., οἱ μὲν ἀφ' ἵππων, οἱ δ' ἀ. νηῶν.. μάχοντο Il.15.386
; ἀφ' ἵππων μάρνασθαι Od.9.49
; so ἡ μάχη ἦν ἀφ' ἵππων Hdt.1.79
; λαμπὰς ἔσται ἀφ' ἵππων on horseback, Pl.R. 328a; ἀφ' ἵππου θηρεύειν X.An.1.2.7
; ἀ. νεῶν πεζομαχεῖν Th. 7.62
; ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν αἰρόμενος τοὺς ἱστοὺς ἀ. τούτων ἐσκοπεῖτο X.HG 6.2.29
; ὀμμάτων ἄπο.. κατέσταζον γένυν, of tears, E.Hec. 240: joined with ἐκ, ἐκ Κορίνθου ἀ. τοῦ στρατοπέδου Pl.Tht. 142a
.

2 of Position, away from, far from, μένων ἀ. ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.2.292
(cf. ἀπ' ἀνδρὸς εἶναι to live apart from a man or husband, Plu.CG4); κεκρυμμένος ἀπ' ἄλλων Od.23.110
; μοῦνος ἀπ' ἄλλων h.Merc. 193
; ἀπ' ὀφθαλμῶν, ἀπ' οὔατος, far from sight or hearing, Il.23.53, 18.272, cf. 22.454; ἀ. θαλάσσης ᾠκίσθησαν Th.1.7
, cf. 46; αὐλίζεσθαι ἀ. τῶν ὅπλων Id.6.64
; ἀπ' οἴκου εἶναι Id.1.99
; σπεύδειν ἀ. ῥυτῆρος far from, i.e. without using the rein, S.OC 900; in Hom. freq. strengthd., τῆλε ἀ..., νόσφιν ἀ..., Il.23.880, 5.322; in measurement of distances, ὅσον ιέ στάδια ἀ. Φυλῆς X.HG2.4.4
, etc.; but later the numeral follows ἀ., πηγὰς ἔχων ἀ. μ σταδίων τῆς θαλάσσης D.S.4.56
; ἀ. σταδίων κ τῆς πόλεως Plu.Phil.4
; κατεστρατοπέδευσεν ἀ. ν σταδίων fifty stades away, Id.Oth.11, cf. D.Chr.17.17.

3 of the mind, ἀ. θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.1.562; ἀ. δόξης 10.324
; οὐ.. ἀ. σκοποῦ οὐδ' ἀ. δόξης Od.11.344
; ἀ. τοῦ ἀνθρωπείου τρόπου Th.1.76
; οὐδὲν ἀ. τρόπου not without reason, Pl.R. 470b; οὐκ ἀ. σκοποῦ, καιροῦ, Id.Tht. 179c, 187e; οὐκ ἀ. γνώμης S. Tr. 389
; οὐκ ἀ. τοῦ πράγματος D.24.6
; μάλα πολλὸν ἀπ' ἐλπίδος ἔπλετο A.R.2.863
.

4 in pregnant sense, with Verbs of rest, previous motion being implied (cf. ἐκ) , ἀνὰ δ' ἐβόασεν.. ἀ. πέτρας σταθείς E.Tr. 523
; ἀ.τῆς ἐμῆς κεφαλῆς τὴν [ἐκείνου] κεφαλὴν ἀναδήσω, i. e. taking the chaplet off my head, and placing it on his, Pl.Smp. 212e: with Verbs of hanging, where ἐκ is more common, ἁψαμένη βρόχον ἀ. μελάθρου Od.11.278
.

5 with the Article, where the sense of motion often disappears, οἱ ἀ. τῶν οἰκιῶν φεύγουσιν, i.e. οἱ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις φεύγουσιν ἀπ' αὐτῶν, X.Cyr.7.5.23; οἱ ἀ. τῶν πύργων.. ἐπαρήξουσι ib.6.4.18; αἴρειν τὰ ἀ. τῆς γῆς Pl.Cra. 410b
; αἱ ἵπποι αἱ ἀ. τοῦ ἅρματος v.l. in Hdt.4.8; ὁ Ἀθηναῖος ὁ ἀ. τοῦ στρατεύματος X.An.7.2.19
; τὸν ἀ. γραμμᾶς κινεῖ λίθον Theoc.6.18
.

6 partitive, λαχὼν ἀ. ληΐδος αἶσαν part taken from the booty, a share of it, Od.5.40; αἴρεσθαι ἀ. τῶν καλπίδων Ar. Lys. 539
; ἀ. ἑκατὸν καὶ εἴκοσι παίδων εἷς μοῦνος Hdt.6.27
; ὀλίγοι ἀ. πολλῶν Th.7.87
, cf. A.Pers. 1023.

7 Math., of figures described upon a base, κῶνον ἀναγράφειν ἀ. κύκλου Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.19
, etc.; τὸ ἀ. τῆς AB τετράγωνον the square on AB, Euc.1.47, cf. 48; εἴδεα ἀ. .. Archim.Spir.10,11.

8 ἀ. ἀνθρώπου ἕως γυναικός man and woman, LXX1 Es.9.40; ἀ. ἀρσενικοῦ ἕως θηλυκοῦib.Nu.5.3.

9 from being, instead of, ἀθανάταν ἀ. θνατᾶς.. ἐποίησας Βερενίκαν Theoc.15.106
.

10 privative, free from, without, ἀ. πάσης ἀκαθαρσίας PLips.16.19
(ii A. D.); ἀ. ζημίας PTeb420.4
(iii A. D.).

II OF TIME, from, after, Hom. only in Il.8.54 ἀ. δείπνου θωρήσσοντο rising up from, i.e. after, cf. Hdt.1.133; ἀ. δείπνου εἶναι or γενέσθαι, Id.1.126, 2.78, 5.18, al.; ἀ. τοῦ σιτίου πίνειν Hp.Salubr.5
; ἀ. τῶν σίτων διαπονεῖσθαι X.Lac. 5.8
; in narrative, τὸ ἀ. τούτου or το̄δε, from this point onwards, Hdt.1.4,2.99; ἀ. τούτου τοῦ χρόνου Id.1.82
, X.An.7.5.8; τὸ ἀπ' ἐκείνου Luc.Tox.25
; ἡμέρῃ δεκάτῃ ἀφ' ἧς.. Hdt.3.14
, etc.; δευτέρῃ ἡμέρῃ ἀ. τῆς ἐμπρήσιος Id.8.55
, cf. X.An.1.7.18, etc.; ἀφ' οὗ χρόνου Id.Cyr. 1.2.13
; more often ἀπ' or ἀφ' οὗ, Hdt.2.44, Th.1.18, etc.; ἀφ' οὗπερ A.Pers. 177
; ἀφ' ἧς Plu.Pel.15
; εὐθὺς ἀ. παλαιοῦ, ἀ. τοῦ πάνυ ἀρχαίου, of olden time, Th.1.2,2.15; ἀπ' ἀρχᾶς Pi.P.8.25
, etc.; ἀ. γενεᾶς X. Cyr.1.2.8
; ἀφ' ἑσπέρας from the beginning of evening, i.e. at eventide, Th.7.29; ἀ. πρώτου ὕπνου ib.43; ἀ. μέσων νυκτῶν Ar.V. 218
; ἀπ' ἀγροῦ fresh from field-work, Ev.Marc.15.21, cf. 7.4; ἀ. νουμηνίας X.An.5.6.23
; χρονίζειν ἀ. τοῦ καιροῦ tarry beyond the time, LXX2 Ki. 20.5; ἀ. τέλους ἐννέα μηνῶν at the end of.., ib.24.8; γενόμενος ἀ. τῆς ἀρχῆς Plu.Caes.5
: hence ἀ. ἀγωνοθετῶν an εχ-ἀγωνοθέτης, IG3.398; ἀ. λογιστῶν POxy.1103.3
(iv A. D.); οἱ ἀ. ὑπατείας, = consulares, Hdn.7.1.9, etc.; but ἀ. τινος the freedman of.., IG5(2).50.59(Tegea, ii A. D.), cf.ib.5(1).1391 ([place name] Andania), 1473.

III OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:

1 of that from which one is born, οὐ γὰρ ἀ. δρυός ἐσσι οὐδ' ἀ. πέτρης not sprung from oak or rock, Od.19.163; γίγνονται δ' ἄρα ταί γ' ἔκ τε κρηνέων ἀ. τ' ἀλσέων 10.350
, cf. S.OT 415, OC 571, etc.: sts. ἀπό denotes remote, and ἐκ immediate, descent, τοὺς μὲν ἀ. θεῶν, τοὺς δ' ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν θεῶν γεγονότας Isoc.12.81
, cf. Hdt.7.150; πέμπτη ἀπ' αὐτοῦ γέννα A.Pr. 853
; τρίτος ἀ. Διός third in descent from Zeus, Pl.R. 391c; οἱ ἀ. γένους τινός his descendants, Plu. Them.32; Περσέως ἀφ' αἵματος E.Alc. 509
: of the place one springs from, ἵπποι.. ποταμοῦ ἄπο Σελλήεντος Il.2.839
. cf. 849; Ἡρακλεῖδαι οἱ ἀ. Σπάρτης Hdt.8.114
, cf. Th.1.89, etc.; τοὺς ἀ. Φρυγίας X.Cyr.2.1.5
, etc.:hence,

b metaph. of things, Χαρίτων ἄπο κάλλος ἔχουσαι Od.6.18
; θεῶν ἄπο μήδεα εἰδώς ib.12; γάλα ἀ. βοός A.Pers. 611
; μῆνις ἀφ' ἡμῶν Id.Eu. 314
; ἡ ἀφ' ὑμῶν τιμωρία Th.1.69
; ὁ ἀ. τῶν πολεμίων φόβος fear inspired by the enemy, X.Cyr.3.3.53.

c of persons, οἱ ἀ. τῆς χώρας, τῆς πόλεως, country folk, townsfolk, Plb.2.6.8, 5.70.8; and so of connexion with the founder or leader of a sect, οἱ ἀ. Πυθαγόρου Luc.Herm.14
; οἱ ἀ. Πλάτωνος Plu.Brut.2
; οἱ ἀ. τοῦ περιπάτου, ἀ. τῆς Στοᾶς, etc., Luc.Cont. 6; generally οἱ ἀ. φιλοσοφίας καὶ λόγων philosophers and learned men, ibid.; οἱ ἀ. σκηνῆς καὶ θεάτρου stage players, Plu.Sull.2; οἱ ἀ. τῆς βουλῆς Id.Caes.10
, etc.; ὁ ἀφ' ἑστίας παῖς, v. ἑστία; ἀπ' ἐξωμίδος with only an ἐξωμίς, S.E.P.1.153.

2 of the material from or of which a thing is made, εἵματα ἀ. ξύλου πεποιημένα Hdt.7.65
; ἀπ' ὄμφακος τεύχειν οἶνον A.Ag. 970
, cf. S.Tr. 704; ὅσσα ἀ. γλυκερῶ μέλιτος Theoc.15.117
; ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου Ev.Matt.3.4
: hence στέφανος ἀ. ταλάντων ἑξήκοντα of or weighing 60 talents, Decr. ap. D. 18.92, cf. Plb.24.1.7, IG2.555.10, al.: hence of value, θύεν αἶγα ἀ. δραχμᾶν εἴκοσι GDI3707
([place name] Cos); κρᾶσις ἀ. τε τῆς ἡδονῆς συγκεκραμένη καὶ ἀ. τῆς λύπης Pl.Phd. 59a
; so, by an extension of this use, εἰδεχθής τις ἀ. τοῦ προσώπου ugly of countenance, Thphr.Char.28.4; θῆλυν ἀ. χροιῆς Theoc.16.49
; σεμνὸς ἀ. τοῦ σχήματος Luc.DMort.10.8
.

3 of the instrument from or by which a thing is done, τοὺς.. πέφνεν ἀπ' ἀργυρέοιο βιοῖο by arrow shot from silver bow, Il.24.605; τόξου ἄπο κρατεροῦ ὀλέκοντα φάλαγγας 8.279
; ἐμῆς ἀπὸ χειρός 10.371
, 11.675; so ἀ. χειρὸς ἐργάζεσθαι μεγάλα Luc.Hist.Conscr.29
; γυμνάζεσθαι ἀ. σκελῶν, χειρῶν, τραχήλου, X.Lac.5.9; μάχεσθαι ἀ. ἄκοντος Str.17.3.7
; ἡ ἀ. τοῦ ξίφους μάχη D.S.5.29
; βάπτειν τὸν δάκτυλον ἀ. τοῦ αἵματος LXX Le.4.7
.

4 of the person from whom an act comes, i.e. by whom it is done, οὐδὲν μέγα ἔργον ἀπ' αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο Hdt.1.14
; ζήτησιν ἀ. σφέων γενέσθαι Id.2.54
; ἐπράχθη οὐδὲν ἀπ' αὐτῶν ἔργον ἀξιόλογον Th.1.17
, cf. 6.61; ἀ. τινος ὄνασθαι Pl.R. 528a
, etc.; so τἀπ' ἐμοῦ, τἀπὸ σοῦ, E.Tr.74, S.OC 1628; τὰ ἀ. τῶν Ἀθηναίων Th.1.127
; in later Greek freq. of the direct agent, Plb.1.34.8, Str.5.4.12, D.H.9.12, Ev.Luc.9.22, J.AJ20.8.10, etc.; in codd. this may sts. be due to confusion with ὑπό, but cf. PMag.Par.1.256, BGU 1185.26(Aug.), SIG820.8(Ephesus, i A. D.), etc.

5 of the source from which life, power, etc., are sustained, ζῆν ἀπ' ὕλης ἀγρίης Hdt.1.203
; ἀ. κτήνεων καὶ ἰχθύων ib. 216; ἀ. πολέμου Id.5.6
; ἀπ' ἐλαχίστων χρημάτων X.Mem.1.2.14
; ἀ. τῆς ἀγορᾶς Id.An.6.1.1
; τρέφειν τὸ ναυτικὸν ἀ. τῶν νήσων Id.HG4.8.9
, cf. Th.1.99; ἀ. τῶν κοινῶν πλουτεῖν Ar.Pl. 569
, cf. D.24.124; ἀ. μικρῶν εὔνους.. γεγένησαι Ar.Eq. 788
, cf. D.18.102;
ἀφ' ὥρας ἐργάζεσθαι
quaestum corpore facere, Plu. Tim.14
.

6 of the cause, means, or occasion from, by, or because of which a thing is done, ἀ. τούτου κριοπρόσωπον τὤγαλμα τοῦ Διὸς ποιεῦσι Hdt.2.42
; ἀ. τινος ἐπαινεῖσθαι, θαυμάζεσθαι, ὠφελεῖσθαι, Th.2.25,6.12, X.Cyr.1.1.2; ἀ. τῶν ξυμφορῶν διαβάλλεσθαι Th.5.17
; τὴν ἐπωνυμίαν ἔχειν ἀ. τινος Id.1.46
; ἀ. λῃστείας τὸν βίον ἔχειν X.An. 7.7.9
; ἀπ' αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων κρίνειν D.2.27
; ἀ. τοῦ πάθους in consequence of.., Th.4.30; βλάπτειν τινὰ ἀ. τινος Id.7.29
; κατασκευάσαντα τὸ πλοῖον ἀφ' ὧν ὑπελάμβανε σωθήσεσθαι D.18.194
; τρόπαιον ἀ. τινος εἱστήκει on occasion of his defeat, Id.19.320; τλήμων οὖσ' ἀπ' εὐτόλμου φρενός A.Ag. 1302
, cf. 1643; ἀ. δικαιοσύνης by reason of it (v. l. for ὑπό), Hdt.7.164; ἀ. τῶν αὐτῶν λημμάτων on the same scale of profits, D.3.34, etc.; for ὅσον ἀ. βοῆς ἕνεκα, v. ἕνεκα: hence in half adverbial usages, ἀ. σπουδῆς in earnest, eagerly, Il.7.359; ἀ. τοῦἴσου, ἀ. τῆς ἴσης, or ἀπ' ἴσης, equally, Th.1.99,15, D.14.6, etc.; ἀπ' ὀρθῆς καὶ δικαίας τῆς ψυχῆς Id.18.298
; ἀ. ἀντιπάλου παρασκευῆς Th.1.91
; ἀ. τοῦ προφανοῦς openly, ib.35; ἀ. τοῦ εὐθέος straightforwardly, Id.3.43; ἀ. τοῦ αὐτομάτου of free-will, Pl.Prt. 323c; ἀ. γλώσσης by word of mouth, Hdt.1.123 (but also, from hearsay, A.Ag. 813); ἀ. στόματος Pl.Tht. 142d
; ἀπ' ὄψεως at sight, Lys.16.19; ἀ. χειρὸς λογίζεσθαι on your fingers, Ar.V. 656; πεύθομαι δ' ἀπ' ὀμμάτων νόστον A.Ag. 988
; ὀμμάτων ἄπο in the public gaze, E.Med. 216; ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου ἄρχοντας καθίστασθαι X.Mem.1.2.9
; ἡ βουλὴ ἡ ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου Th.8.66
, cf. IG1.9; τοὺς ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου δισχιλίους ἄνδρας Arist.Ath.24.3
; τριηράρχους αἱρεῖσθαι ἀ. τῆς οὐσίας Decr. ap. D.18.106; ἀφ' ἑαυτοῦ from oneself, on one's own account, Th.8.6, etc.; ἀφ' ἑαυτοῦ γνώμης Id.4.68
; ἀ. συνθήματος, ἀ. παραγγέλματος, by agreement, by word of command, Hdt.5.74, Th.8.99; ἀ. σάλπιγγος by sound of trumpet, X.Eq.Mag.3.12 (s.v.l.); ἐπίτροπος ἀ. τῶν λόγων, = Lat. procurator a rationibus, Ann.Epigr..1913.143a (Ephesus, ii A. D.).

7 of the object spoken of, τὰ ἀ. τῆς νήσου οἰκότα ἐστί the things told from or of the island.., Hdt.4.195, cf. 54, 7.195; νόμος κείμενος ἀ. τῶν τεχνῶν Ar.Ra. 762
.

B in Arc., Cypr., ἀπύ takes dat., ἀπὺ τᾷ [ἁμέρᾳ] IG5(2).6 ([place name] Tegea); ἀπὺ τᾷ ζᾷ Inscr.Cypr.135.8
H. ([place name] Idalion).

2 in later Greek ἀπό is found c. acc., PLond.1.124.30 (iv/v A. D.).

C in Hom. frequent with Verbs in tmesi, as Il.5.214, etc., and sts. in Prose, as Hdt.8.89.

D IN COMPOS.:

1 asunder, as ἀποκόπτω, ἀπολύω, ἀποτέμνω: and hence, away, off, as ἀποβάλλω, ἀποβαίνω; denoting, remoual of an accusation, as ἀπολογέομαι, ἀποψηφίζομαι.

2 finishing off, completing, ἀπεργάζομαι, ἀπανδρόω, ἀπανθρωπίζω, ἀπογλαυκόω.

3 ceasing from, leaving off, as ἀπαλγέω, ἀποκηδεύω, ἀπολοφύρομαι, ἀποζέω, ἀπανθίζω, ἀφυβρίζω.

4 back again, as ἀποδίδωμι, ἀπολαμβάνω, ἀπόπλους: also, in full, or what is one's own, as ἀπέχω, ἀπολαμβάνω: freq. it only strengthens the sense of the simple.

5 by way of abuse, as in ἀποκαλέω.

6 almost = ἀ- priv.; sts. with Verbs, as ἀπαυδάω, ἀπαγορεύω; more freq. with Adjectives, as ἀποχρήματος, ἀπότιμος, ἀπόσιτος, ἀπόφονος.

E ἄπο, by anastrophe for ἀπό, when it follows its Noun, as ὀμμάτων ἄπο S.El. 1231
, etc.; never in Prose.

2 ἄπο for ἄπεστι, Semon.1.20, Timocr.9.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀπό
18 δόξα

δόξα, ης, ἡ (s. δοξάζω; in var. mngs. Hom.+; in Ath. ‘meaning’). In many of the passages in our lit. the OT and Gr-Rom. perceptions of dependence of fame and honor on extraordinary performance deserve further exploration. SIG 456, 15 is typical: concern for others leads to enhancement of one’s δόξα or reputation. The Common Gk. usage of δ. in sense of ‘notion, opinion’ is not found in the NT.

① the condition of being bright or shining, brightness, splendor, radiance (a distinctive aspect of Hb. כָּבוֹד).

ⓐ of physical phenomena (PGM 13, 189 τὴν δόξαν τοῦ φωτός, cp. 298ff. On this Rtzst., Mysterienrel.³ 357ff, also 314 δόξα ἐκ τ. πυρός [cp. Just., D. 128]; 315 φῶς κ. δόξαν θεῖαν [=Cleopatra 150]; LXX; TestJob 43:6 τῆ λαμπάδα αὐτοῦ) οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δ. τοῦ φωτός I could not see because of the brightness of the light Ac 22:11; ὁρᾶν τὴν δ. see the radiance Lk 9:32; cp. vs. 31. Everything in heaven has this radiance: the radiant bodies in the sky 1 Cor 15:40f (cp. PGM 13, 64 σὺ ἔδωκας ἡλίῳ τὴν δόξαν κ. δύναμιν; 448; Sir 43:9, 12; 50:7).

ⓑ of humans involved in transcendent circumstances, and also transcendent beings: cherubim (Sir 49:8; Ezk 10:4) Hb 9:5; angels Lk 2:9; Rv 18:1. Esp. of God’s self (Ex 24:17; 40:34; Num 14:10; Bar 5:9 τὸ φῶς τῆς δόξης αὐτου; Tob 12:15; 13:16 BA; 2 Macc 2:8; SibOr 5, 427) ὁ θεὸς τῆς δ. (En 25:7) Ac 7:2 (Ps 28:3); cp. J 12:41 (Is 6:1); Ac 7:55; 2 Th 1:9; 2 Pt 1:17b; Rv 15:8; 19:1; 21:11, 23. ὁ πατὴρ τῆς δ. Eph 1:17; βασιλεὺς τῆς δ. AcPl BMM verso 24 and 26. But also of those who appear before God: Moses 2 Cor 3:7–11, 18 (Just., D. 127, 3; cp. Ἀδὰμ τῆς δ. θεοῦ ἐγυμνώθη GrBar 4:16); Christians in the next life 1 Cor 15:43; Col 3:4. The δόξα τοῦ θεοῦ as it relates to the final judgment Ro 3:23; 5:2 (but s. 3); Jesus himself has a σῶμα τῆς δ. radiant, glorious body Phil 3:21; cp. 2 Cl 17:5. Christ is the κύριος τ. δόξης 1 Cor 2:8 (cp. En 22:14; 27:3, 5; 36:4; 40:3 of God; PGM 7, 713 κύριοι δόξης of deities).—The concept has been widened to denote the glory, majesty, sublimity of God in general (PGM 4, 1202 ἐφώνησά σου τ. ἀνυπέρβλητον δόξαν; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 1, 24 οἰκοδομεῖν … ναὸν δόξης θεοῦ) ἀλλάσσειν τὴν δ. τοῦ θεοῦ exchange the majesty of God Ro 1:23; κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ Jd 24 (cp. En 104:1)=before himself. Christ was raised fr. the dead διὰ τῆς δ. τοῦ πατρός by the majesty (here, as in J 2:11, the thought of power, might is also present; cp. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.³ 344, 359 and PGM 4, 1650 δὸς δόξαν καὶ χάριν τῷ φυλακτηρίῳ τούτῳ; Wsd 9:11 φυλάξει με ἐν τ. δόξῃ; Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 45.—JVogel, Het sanscrit woord tejas [=gloedvuur] in de beteekenis van magische Kracht 1930) of the Father Ro 6:4; cp. Mt 16:27; Mk 8:38; AcPl Ha 10, 9; ὄψῃ τὴν δ. τοῦ θεοῦ J 11:40; κράτος τῆς δ. majestic power Col 1:11; πλοῦτος τῆς δ. the wealth of his glory Ro 9:23; Eph 1:18; cp. Eph 3:16; Phil 4:19; Col 1:27; δ. τῆς χάριτος (PGM 4, 1650, s. above) Eph 1:6; w. ἀρετή 2 Pt 1:3 (τῆς ἐπʼ ἀρετῇ καὶ δόξῃ διαλήψεως, ins at Aphrodisias II, 14: ZPE 8, ’71, 186); ἀπαύγασμα τῆς δ. Hb 1:3; τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δ. τοῦ μεγάλου θεοῦ Tit 2:13. Some would classify Ro 2:7, 10 here, but these and related pass. w. the formulation δόξα καὶ τιμή prob. are better placed in 3 below because of their focus on honor and prestige. Doxol. σοῦ ἐστιν ἡ δ. εἰς τ. αἰῶνας, ἀμήν (Odes 12:15 [Prayer of Manasseh]) Mt 6:13 v.l.; AcPl Ha 2, 33; εἰς ἔπαινον τῆς δ. αὐτοῦ Eph 1:12, 14; cp. 1:6.—1 Th 2:12; 1 Pt 5:10. Pl. Hv 1, 3, 3. κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς δ. τοῦ μακαρίου θεοῦ 1 Ti 1:11. Transferred to Christ: Mt 19:28; 24:30; 25:31; Mk 10:37; 13:26; Lk 9:26; 21:27; J 1:14; 2:11; Js 2:1 (AMeyer, D. Rätsel d. Js 1930, 118ff); B 12:7; AcPl Ha 7:7. τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δ. τοῦ χριστοῦ the news that shines with the greatness of Christ 2 Cor 4:4; cp. 4:6 (cp. Just., A I, 51, 8 παραγίνεσθαι μετὰ δόξης μέλλει). Of Christ’s prestige promoted by Paul’s associates 2 Cor 8:23 (but s. d and 3 below).

ⓒ The state of being in the next life is thus described as participation in the radiance or glory

α. w. ref. to Christ: εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν δ. αὐτοῦ enter into his glory Lk 24:26 (βασιλείαν P⁷⁵ first hand); ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δ. 1 Ti 3:16; cp. τὰς μετὰ ταῦτα δ.1 Pt 1:11 (but s. β below; pl. because of the παθήματα; cp. also Wsd 18:24; Isocr. 4, 51; POslo 85, 13 [III A.D.]), 21. ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει τῆς δ. αὐτοῦ 4:13. Also of Christ’s preëxistence: J 17:5, 22, 24.

β. w. ref. to his followers (cp. Da 12:13; Herm. Wr. 10, 7): Ro 8:18, 21; 1 Cor 2:7; 2 Cor 4:17; 1 Th 2:12; 2 Th 2:14; 2 Ti 2:10; Hb 2:10; 1 Pt 5:1, 4 (στέφανος τ. δόξης; on this expr. cp. Jer 13:18; TestBenj 4:1); εἰς … δ. καὶ τιμὴν ἐν ἀποκαλύψει Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Pt 1:7 (perh. 1:11 belongs here, in ref. to sufferings that are endured in behalf of Christ). πνεῦμα τῆς δ. w. πν. τοῦ θεοῦ 4:14. ἵνα πνευματικὴν καὶ ἄφθαρτον τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξαν κληρονομήσωσιν ending of Mk 16:14 v.l. (Freer ms. ln. 11f) (Cleopatra 146f ἐνέδυσεν αὐτοὺς θείαν δόξαν πνευματικήν); ἥτις ἐστὶν δ. ὑμῶν (my troubles) promote your glory Eph 3:13 (s. MDibelius, comm. on Col 1:24ff) τόπος τῆς δ.=the hereafter 1 Cl 5:4.

ⓓ of reflected radiance reflection ἀνὴρ … εἰκὼν καὶ δόξα θεοῦ man (as distinguished from woman) is the image and reflection of God 1 Cor 11:7 (perh. this thought finds expression Ro 3:23; 5:2, but s. 3, below); also γυνὴ δόξα ἀνδρός ibid. (cp. the formal similarity but difft. mng. in the Jewish ins in Lietzmann comm. ad loc.: ἡ δόξα Σωφρονίου Λούκιλλα εὐλογημένη; s. also AFeuillet, RB 81, ’74, 161–82). Some interpret δ. Χριστοῦ 2 Cor 8:23 in ref. to Paul’s associates (but s. 1b).

② a state of being magnificent, greatness, splendor, anything that catches the eye (1 Esdr 6:9; 1 Macc 10:60, 86; 2 Macc 5:20): fine clothing (Sir 6:31; 27:8; 45:7; 50:11) of a king Mt 6:29; Lk 12:27; of royal splendor gener. (Bar 5:6; 1 Macc 10:58; Jos., Ant. 8, 166) Mt 4:8; Lk 4:6; Rv 21:24, 26. Gener. of human splendor of any sort 1 Pt 1:24 (Is 40:6).

③ honor as enhancement or recognition of status or performance, fame, recognition, renown, honor, prestige (s. s.v. ἀγαθός and δικαιο-entries; Diod S 15, 61, 5 abs. δόξα= good reputation; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 89 §376 δ. ἀγαθή good reputation, esteem; Polyaenus 8 Prooem. δόξα ἀθάνατος=eternal renown; Herm. Wr. 14, 7; PsSol 1:4; 17:6; Jos., Ant. 4, 14, Vi. 274; Just., A II, 10, 8 δόξης … καταφρονήσαντος) of public approbation (cp. Orig., C. Cels. 7, 24, 1; Did., Gen. 238, 25) ἐνώπιον πάντων τῶν συνανακειμένων σοι Lk 14:10; δ. λαμβάνειν (En 99:1; Diog. L. 9, 37 of Democr. οὐκ ἐκ τόπου δόξαν λαβεῖν βουλόμενος) J 5:41, 44a al.; sim. of God Rv 4:11 and the Lamb 5:12 receiving honor. J 8:54 (=make high claims for myself); 12:43a (cp. 8:50); Ro 9:4; 2 Cor 6:8 (opp. ἀτιμία); 1 Th 2:6; 1 Cl 3:1; B 19:3; Hv 1, 1, 8. Gener. γυνὴ … ἐὰν κομᾷ, δόξα αὐτῇ ἐστιν, i.e. she enjoys a favorable reputation 1 Cor 11:15 (opp. ἀτιμία). Oxymoron ὧν … ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ αἰσχύνῃ αὐτῶν whose prestige is in their disgrace Phil 3:19. Of enhancement of divine prestige as an objective J 7:18; Lazarus’ illness redounds to God’s honor 11:4; Ro 15:7. Of divine approbation of pers. δ. τοῦ θεοῦ J 5:44b; 12:43b (cp. 1QH 17:15; 1QS 4:23); Ro 3:23; 5:2. Here also belong pass. w. the form δὸξα καὶ τιμή / τιμὴ καὶ δόξα (LXX; ins, e.g. OGI 223, 12; 244, 19f; 763, 37; Welles 42, 6; also PGM 4, 1616f δὸς δ. καὶ τιμὴν κ. χάριν; Just., D. 42, 1) Ro 2:7, 10; 1 Ti 1:17; Hb 2:7, 9 (Ps 8:6); cp. 3:3; 1 Pt 1:7; 2 Pt 1:17; Rv 4:9, 11; 5:12, 13; 21:26. Of pers. who bestow renown through their excellence: of Jesus Lk 2:32 (cp. Ro 9:4); of Paul’s epistolary recipients ὑμεῖς ἡ δ. ἡμῶν you bring us renown 1 Th 2:20 (cp. the Jewish ins in Lietzmann, 1d above: Loucilla brings renown to Sophronius).—Israel’s liturgy furnishes the pattern for the liturg. formula δ. θεῷ praise is (BWeiss; HHoltzmann; Harnack; Zahn; EKlostermann; ASchlatter; Rengstorf) or be (Weizsäcker; JWeiss; OHoltzmann) to God Lk 2:14. Cp. 19:38; Ro 11:36; 16:27; Gal 1:5; Eph 3:21; Phil 4:20; 2 Ti 4:18 (perh. Christ as referent); Hb 13:21; 1 Pt 4:11; 1 Cl 20:12; 50:7 al.; τιμὴ καὶ δ. 1 Ti 1:17 (s. also above as extra-biblical formulation, esp. OGI 223, 12; 244, 19f; 763, 37); cp. Jd 25 v.l.; Rv 5:13; 7:12. Doxologies to Christ 2 Pt 3:18; Rv 1:6; εἰς (τὴν) δ. (τοῦ) θεοῦ to the praise of God Ro 15:7; 1 Cor 10:31; 2 Cor 4:15; Phil 1:11; 2:11; cp. Ro 3:7. Also πρὸ δ. 2 Cor 1:20; πρὸ τὴν αὐτοῦ τοῦ κυρίου (Christ) δ. 8:19. Hence the expr. δ. διδόναι τῷ θεῷ praise God (Bar 2:17f; 1 Esdr 9:8; 4 Macc 1:12): in thanksgiving Lk 17:18; Rv 19:7; as a form of relig. devotion: Ac 12:23; Ro 4:20; Rv 4:9; 11:13; 14:7; 16:9; as an adjuration δὸς δ. τῷ θεῷ give God the praise by telling the truth J 9:24.—GBoobyer, ‘Thanksgiving’ and the ‘Glory of God’ in Paul, diss. Leipzig 1929; LChampion, Benedictions and Doxologies in the Epistles of Paul ’35; MPamment, The Meaning of δόξα in the Fourth Gospel: ZNW 74, ’83, 12–16, God’s glory is manifested through the gift of Jesus’ voluntary self-surrender on the cross.

④ a transcendent being deserving of honor, majestic being, by metonymy (cp. Diod S 15, 58, 1 of citizens who stood out from among all others in ἐξουσίαι καὶ δόξαι=offices and honors) of angelic beings (s. Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 45; PGM 1, 199) δόξαι majestic (heavenly) beings Jd 8; 2 Pt 2:10 (s. also Ex 15:11 LXX; TestJud 25:2 αἱ δυνάμεις τ. δόξης. Also the magical text in Rtzst., Poim. p. 28 [VI 17] χαιρέτωσάν σου αἱ δόξαι (practically = δυνάμει) εἰς αἰῶνα, κύριε). Cp. JSickenberger, Engelsoder Teufelslästerer? Festschrift zur Jahrhundertfeier d. Univers. Breslau 1911, 621ff. The mng. majesties and by metonymy illustrious persons is also prob.—On the whole word Rtzst., Mysterienrel.³ 289; 314f; 344; 355ff; AvGall, D. Herrlichkeit Gottes 1900; IAbrahams, The Glory of God 1925.—AForster, The Mng. of Δόξα in the Greek Bible: ATR 12, 1929/1930, 311ff; EOwen, Δόξα and Cognate Words: JTS 33, ’32, 139–50; 265–79; CMohrmann, Note sur doxa: ADebrunner Festschr. ’54, 321–28; LBrockington, LXX Background to the NT Use of δ., Studies in the Gospels in memory of RLightfoot ’55, 1–8.—HBöhlig, D. Geisteskultur v. Tarsos 1913, 97ff; GWetter, D. Verherrlichung im Joh.-ev.: Beitr. z. Rel.-wiss. II 1915, 32–113, Phos 1915; RLloyd, The Word ‘Glory’ in the Fourth Gospel: ET 43, ’32, 546–48; BBotte, La gloire du Christ dans l’Evangile de S. Jean: Quest. liturgiques 12, 1927, 65ff; HPass, The Glory of the Father; a Study in St John 13–17, ’35; WThüsing, Die Erhöhung u. Verherrlichung Jesu im J, ’60.—GKittel, D. Rel. gesch. u. d. Urchristentum ’32, 82ff; JSchneider, Doxa ’32; HKittel, D. Herrlichkeit Gottes ’34; MGreindl, Κλεος, Κυδος, Ευχος, Τιμη, Φατις, Δοξα, diss. Munich ’38; AVermeulen, Semantic Development of Gloria in Early-Christian Latin ’56.—RAC IV 210–16; XI 196–225.—B. 1144f. DELG s.v. δοκάω etc. II p. 291. Schmidt, Syn. I 321–28, s. δοκέω. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > δόξα
19 ἐν

ἐν prep. w. dat. (Hom.+). For lit. s. ἀνά and εἰς, beg. For special NT uses s. AOepke, TW II 534–39. The uses of this prep. are so many and various, and oft. so easily confused, that a strictly systematic treatment is impossible. It must suffice to list the main categories, which will help establish the usage in individual cases. The earliest auditors/readers, not being inconvenienced by grammatical and lexical debates, would readily absorb the context and experience little difficulty.

① marker of a position defined as being in a location, in, among (the basic idea, Rob. 586f)

ⓐ of the space or place within which someth. is found, in: ἐν τῇ πόλει Lk 7:37. ἐν Βηθλέεμ Mt 2:1. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 3:1 (Just., D. 19, 5, cp. A I, 12, 6 ἐν ἐρημίᾳ) ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ Ac 5:42. ἐν οἴκῳ 1 Ti 3:15 and very oft. ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house Lk 2:49 and perh. Mt 20:15 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302, C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός; PTebt 12, 3; POxy 523, 3; Tob 6:11 S; Goodsp., Probs. 81–83). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ Mt 20:3. ἐν (τῷ) οὐρανῷ in heaven (Arat., Phaen. 10; Diod S 4, 61, 6; Plut., Mor. 359d τὰς ψυχὰς ἐν οὐρανῷ λάμπειν ἄστρα; Tat. 12, 2 τὰ ἄστρα τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ) Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3); Rv 12:1; IEph 19:2.—W. quotations and accounts of the subject matter of literary works: in (Ps.-Demetr. c. 226 ὡς ἐν τῷ Εὐθυδήμῳ; Simplicius in Epict. p. 28, 37 ἐν τῷ Φαίδωνι; Ammon. Hermiae in Aristot. De Interpret. c. 9 p. 136, 20 Busse ἐν Τιμαίῳ παρειλήφαμεν=we have received as a tradition; 2 Macc 2:4; 1 Esdr 1:40; 5:48; Sir 50:27; Just., A I, 60, 1 ἐν τῷ παρὰ Πλάτωνι Τιμαίῳ) ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9. ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Lk 24:44; J 1:45. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις Ac 13:40. ἐν Ἠλίᾳ in the story of Elijah Ro 11:2 (Just., D. 120, 3 ἐν τῷ Ἰούδα). ἐν τῷ Ὡσηέ 9:25 (Just., D. 44, 2 ἐν τῷ Ἰεζεκιήλ). ἐν Δαυίδ in the Psalter ( by David is also prob.: s. 6) Hb 4:7. ἐν ἑτέρῳ προφήτῃ in another prophet B 6:14. Of inner life φανεροῦσθαι ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσι be made known to (your) consciences 2 Cor 5:11. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Mt 5:28; 13:19; 2 Cor 11:12 et al.

ⓑ on ἐν τῷ ὄρει (X., An. 4, 3, 31; Diod S 14, 16, 2 λόφος ἐν ᾧ=a hill on which; Jos., Ant. 12, 259; Just., D. 67, 9 ἐν ὄρει Χωρήβ) J 4:20f; Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ in the market Mt 20:3. ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mt 5:25. ἐν πλαξίν on tablets 2 Cor 3:3. ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν on the street corners Mt 6:5.

ⓒ within the range of, at, near (Soph., Fgm. 37 [34 N.²] ἐν παντὶ λίθῳ=near every stone; Artem. 4, 24 p. 217, 19 ἐν Τύρῳ=near Tyre; Polyaenus 8, 24, 7 ἐν τῇ νησῖδι=near the island; Diog. L. 1, 34; 85; 97 τὰ ἐν ποσίν=what is before one’s feet; Jos., Vi. 227 ἐν Χαβωλώ) ἐν τῷ γαζοφυλακείῳ (q.v.) J 8:20. ἐν τῷ Σιλωάμ near the pool of Siloam Lk 13:4. καθίζειν ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ τινος sit at someone’s right hand (cp. 1 Esdr 4:29) Eph 1:20; Hb 1:3; 8:1.

ⓓ among, in (Hom.+; PTebt 58, 41 [111 B.C.]; Sir 16:6; 31:9; 1 Macc 4:58; 5:2; TestAbr B 9 p. 13, 27 [Stone p. 74]; Just., A I, 5, 4 ἐν βαρβάροις) ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ in the generation now living Mk 8:38. ἐν τῷ γένει μου among my people Gal 1:14 (Just., D. 51, 1 al. ἐν τῷ γένει ὑμῶν). ἐν ἡμῖν Hb 13:26. ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ in the crowd Mk 5:30 (cp. Sir 7:7). ἐν ἀλλήλοις mutually (Thu. 1, 24, 4; Just., D. 101, 3) Ro 1:12; 15:5. ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν (=among the commanding officers: Diod S 18, 61, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 21 §84) Ἰούδα Mt 2:6 et al. ἐν ἀνθρώποις among people (as Himerius, Or. 48 [14], 11; Just., A I, 23, 3, D. 64, 7) Lk 2:14; cp. Ac 4:12.

ⓔ before, in the presence of, etc. (cp. Od. 2, 194; Eur., Andr. 359; Pla., Leg. 9, 879b; Demosth. 24, 207; Polyb. 5, 39, 6; Epict. 3, 22, 8; Appian, Maced. 18 §2 ἐν τοῖς φίλοις=in the presence of his friends; Sir 19:8; Jdth 6:2; PPetr. II, 4 [6], 16 [255/254 B.C.] δινὸν γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλῳ ἀτιμάζεσθαι=before a crowd) σοφίαν λαλοῦμεν ἐν τοῖς τελείοις in the presence of mature (i.e. spiritually sophisticated) adults 1 Cor 2:6 (cp. Simplicius in Epict. p. 131, 20 λέγειν τὰ θεωρήματα ἐν ἰδιώταις). ἐν τ. ὠσὶν ὑμῶν in your hearing Lk 4:21 (cp. Judg 17:2; 4 Km 23:2; Bar 1:3f), where the words can go linguistically just as well w. πεπλήρωται as w. ἡ γραφὴ αὕτη (this passage of scripture read in your hearing). ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς τινος in someone’s eyes, i.e. judgment (Wsd 3:2; Sir 8:16; Jdth 3:4; 12:14; 1 Macc 1:12) Mt 21:42 (Ps 117:23). ἔν τινι in the same mng. as early as Trag. (Soph., Oed. C. 1213 ἐν ἐμοί=in my judgment, Ant. 925 ἐν θεοῖς καλά; also Pla., Prot. 337b; 343c) ἐν ἐμοί 1 Cor 14:11; possibly J 3:21 (s. 4c below) and Jd 1 belong here.—In the ‘forensic’ sense ἔν τινι can mean in someone’s court or forum (Soph., Ant. 459; Pla., Gorg. 464d, Leg. 11, 916b; Ael. Aristid. 38, 3 K.=7 p. 71 D.; 46 p. 283, 334 D.; Diod S 19, 51, 4; Ps.-Heraclit., Ep. 4, 6; but in several of these pass. the mng. does not go significantly beyond ‘in the presence of’ [s. above]) ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Cor 6:2 ( by you is also tenable; s. 6 below).

ⓕ esp. to describe certain processes, inward: ἐν ἑαυτῷ to himself, i.e. in silence, διαλογίζεσθαι Mk 2:8; Lk 12:17; διαπορεῖν Ac 10:17; εἰδέναι J 6:61; λέγειν Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 7:49; εἰπεῖν 7:39 al.; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι J 11:38.

② marker of a state or condition, in

ⓐ of being clothed and metaphors assoc. with such condition in, with (Hdt. 2, 159; X., Mem. 3, 11, 4; Diod S 1, 12, 9; Herodian 2, 13, 3; Jdth 10:3; 1 Macc 6:35; 2 Macc 3:33) ἠμφιεσμένον ἐν μαλακοῖς dressed in soft clothes Mt 11:8. περιβάλλεσθαι ἐν ἱματίοις Rv 3:5; 4:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐν ἐνδύμασι προβάτων come in sheep’s clothing Mt 7:15. περιπατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς walk about in long robes Mk 12:38 (Tat. 2, 1 ἐν πορφυρίδι περιπατῶν); cp. Ac 10:30; Mt 11:21; Lk 10:13. ἐν λευκοῖς in white (Artem. 2, 3; 4, 2 ἐν λευκοῖς προϊέναι; Epict. 3, 22, 1) J 20:12; Hv 4, 2, 1. Prob. corresp. ἐν σαρκί clothed in flesh (cp. Diod S 1, 12, 9 deities appear ἐν ζῴων μορφαῖς) 1 Ti 3:16; 1J 4:2; 2J 7. ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ in all his glory Mt 6:29 (cp. 1 Macc 10:86). ἐν τ. δόξῃ τοῦ πατρός clothed in his Father’s glory 16:27; cp. 25:31; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:31.

ⓑ of other states and conditions (so freq. w. γίνομαι, εἰμί; Attic wr.; PPetr II, 11 [1], 8 [III B.C.] γράφε, ἵνα εἰδῶμεν ἐν οἷς εἶ; 39 [g], 16; UPZ 110, 176 [164 B.C.] et al.; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 2 πάλιν ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ γενέσθαι; 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι; Tat. 20, 1f οὐκ ἔστι γὰρ ἄπειρος ὁ οὐρανός, … πεπερασμένος δὲ καὶ ἐν τέρματι; Mel., HE 4, 26, 6 ἐν … λεηλασίᾳ ‘plundering’): ὑπάρχων ἐν βασάνοις Lk 16:23. ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1J 3:14. ἐν ζωῇ Ro 5:10. ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς Phlm 13 (Just., A II, 2, 11 ἐν δ. γενέσθαι). ἐν πειρασμοῖς 1 Pt 1:6; ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκός Ro 8:3. ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Th 2:2. ἐν φθορᾷ in a state of corruptibility 1 Cor 15:42. ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχειν 2 Cor 10:6 (cp. PEleph 10, 7 [223/222 B.C.] τ. λοιπῶν ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ὄντων; PGen 76, 8; 3 Macc 5:8); ἐν ἐκστάσει in a state of trance Ac 11:5 (opp. Just., D, 115, 3 ἐν καταστάσει ὤν). Of qualities: ἐν πίστει κ. ἀγάπῃ κ. ἁγιασμῷ 1 Ti 2:15; ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ Tit 3:3; ἐν πανουργίᾳ 2 Cor 4:2; ἐν εὐσεβείᾳ καὶ σεμνότητι 1 Ti 2:2; ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:26; ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7; ἐν δόξῃ Phil 4:19.

③ marker of extension toward a goal that is understood to be within an area or condition, into: ἐν is somet. used w. verbs of motion where εἰς would normally be expected (Diod S 23, 8, 1 Ἄννων ἐπέρασε ἐν Σικελίᾳ; Hero I 142, 7; 182, 4; Paus. 7, 4, 3 διαβάντες ἐν τῇ Σάμῳ; Epict. 1, 11, 32; 2, 20, 33; Aelian, VH 4, 18; Vett. Val. 210, 26; 212, 6 al., s. index; Pel.-Leg. 1, 4; 5; 2, 1; PParis 10, 2 [145 B.C.] ἀνακεχώρηκεν ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ; POxy 294, 4; BGU 22, 13; Tob 5:5 BA; 1 Macc 10:43; TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 23=Stone p. 60 [s. on the LXX Thackeray 25]; πέμψον αὐτοὺς ἐν πολέμῳ En 10:9; TestAbr A 6 p. 83, 22 [Stone p. 14] δάκρυα … ἐν τῷ νιπτῆρι πίπτοντα): εἰσέρχεσθαι Lk 9:46; Rv 11:11; ἀπάγειν GJs 6:1; ἀνάγειν 7:1; εἰσάγειν 10:1; καταβαίνειν J 5:3 (4) v.l.; ἀναβαίνειν GJs 22:13; ἀπέρχεσθαι (Diod S 23, 18, 5) Hs 1:6; ἥκειν GJs 5:1; ἀποστέλλειν 25:1. To be understood otherwise: ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ the word went out = spread in all Judaea Lk 7:17; likew. 1 Th 1:8. The metaphorical expr. ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων turn the disobedient to the wisdom of the righteous Lk 1:17 is striking but consistent w. the basic sense of ἐν. S. also γίνομαι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι, καλέω, and τίθημι. ἐν μέσῳ among somet. answers to the question ‘whither’ (B-D-F §215, 3) Mt 10:16; Lk 10:3; 8:7.

④ marker of close association within a limit, in

ⓐ fig., of pers., to indicate the state of being filled w. or gripped by someth.: in someone=in one’s innermost being ἐν αὐτῷ κατοικεῖ πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα in him dwells all the fullness Col 2:9. ἐν αὐτῷ ἐκτίσθη τὰ πάντα (prob. to be understood as local, not instrumental, since ἐν αὐ. would otherwise be identical w. διʼ αὐ. in the same vs.) everything was created in association with him 1:16 (cp. M. Ant. 4, 23 ἐν σοὶ πάντα; Herm. Wr. 5, 10; AFeuillet, NTS 12, ’65, 1–9). ἐν τῷ θεῷ κέκρυπται ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν your life is hid in God 3:3; cp. 2:3. Of sin in humans Ro 7:17f; cp. κατεργάζεσθαι vs. 8. Of Christ who, as a spiritual being, fills people so as to be in charge of their lives 8:10; 2 Cor 13:5, abides J 6:56, lives Gal 2:20, and takes form 4:19 in them. Of the divine word: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1J 1:10; μένειν ἔν τινι J 5:38; ἐνοικεῖν Col 3:16. Of God’s spirit: οἰκεῖν (ἐνοικεῖν) ἔν τινι Ro 8:9, 11; 1 Cor 3:16; 2 Ti 1:14. Of spiritual gifts 1 Ti 4:14; 2 Ti 1:6. Of miraculous powers ἐνεργεῖν ἔν τινι be at work in someone Mt 14:2; Mk 6:14; ποιεῖν ἔν τινι εὐάρεστον Hb 13:21. The same expr. of God or evil spirits, who somehow work in people: 1 Cor 12:6; Phil 2:13; Eph 2:2 al.

ⓑ of the whole, w. which the parts are closely joined: μένειν ἐν τῇ ἀμπέλῳ remain in the vine J 15:4. ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι μέλη πολλὰ ἔχομεν in one body we have many members Ro 12:4. κρέμασθαι ἔν τινι depend on someth. Mt 22:40.

ⓒ esp. in Paul. or Joh. usage, to designate a close personal relation in which the referent of the ἐν-term is viewed as the controlling influence: under the control of, under the influence of, in close association with (cp. ἐν τῷ Δαυιδ εἰμί 2 Km 19:44): of Christ εἶναι, μένειν ἐν τῷ πατρί (ἐν τῷ θεῷ) J 10:38; 14:10f (difft. CGordon, ‘In’ of Predication or Equivalence: JBL 100, ’81, 612f); and of Christians 1J 3:24; 4:13, 15f; be or abide in Christ J 14:20; 15:4f; μένειν ἐν τῷ υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ πατρί 1J 2:24. ἔργα ἐν θεῷ εἰργασμένα done in communion with God J 3:21 (but s. 1e above).—In Paul the relation of the individual to Christ is very oft. expressed by such phrases as ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν κυρίῳ etc., also vice versa (FNeugebauer, NTS 4, ’57/58, 124–38; AWedderburn, JSNT 25, ’85, 83–97) ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός Gal 2:20, but here in the sense of a above.—See, e.g., Dssm., D. ntl. Formel ‘in Christo Jesu’ 1892; EWeber, D. Formel ‘in Chr. Jesu’ u. d. paul. Christusmystik: NKZ 31, 1920, 213ff; LBrun, Zur Formel ‘in Chr. Jesus’ im Phil: Symbolae Arctoae 1, 1922, 19–37; MHansen, Omkring Paulus-Formeln ‘i Kristus’: TK 4/10, 1929, 135–59; HBöhlig, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 170–75; OSchmitz, D. Christusgemeinschaft d. Pls² ’56; AWikenhauser, D. Christusmystik d. Pls² ’56; KMittring, Heilswirklichkeit b. Pls; Beitrag z. Verständnis der unio cum Christo in d. Plsbriefen 1929; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik d. Ap. Pls 1930 (Eng. tr., WMontgomery, The Myst. of Paul the Ap., ’31); WSchmauch, In Christus ’35; BEaston, Pastoral Ep. ’47, 210f; FBüchsel, ‘In Chr.’ b. Pls: ZNW 42, ’49, 141–58. Also HKorn, D. Nachwirkungen d. Christusmystik d. Pls in den Apost. Vätern, diss. Berlin 1928; EAndrews, Interpretation 6, ’52, 162–77; H-LParisius, ZNW 49, ’58, 285–88 (10 ‘forensic’ passages); JAllan, NTS 5, ’58/59, 54–62 (Eph), ibid. 10, ’63, 115–21 (pastorals); FNeugebauer, In Christus, etc. ’61; MDahl, The Resurrection of the Body ( 1 Cor 15) ’62, 110–13.—Paul has the most varied expressions for this new life-principle: life in Christ Ro 6:11, 23; love in Christ 8:39; grace, which is given in Christ 1 Cor 1:4; freedom in Chr. Gal 2:4; blessing in Chr. 3:14; unity in Chr. vs. 28. στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ stand firm in the Lord Phil 4:1; εὑρεθῆναι ἐν Χ. be found in Christ 3:9; εἶναι ἐν Χ. 1 Cor 1:30; οἱ ἐν Χ. Ro 8:1.—1 Pt 5:14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χ., ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ 1 Cor 15:18.—Rv 14:13; ζῳοποιεῖσθαι 1 Cor 15:22.—The formula is esp. common w. verbs that denote a conviction, hope, etc. πεποιθέναι Gal 5:10; Phil 1:14; 2 Th 3:4. παρρησίαν ἔχειν Phlm 8. πέπεισμαι Ro 14:14. ἐλπίζειν Phil 2:19. καύχησιν ἔχειν Ro 15:17; 1 Cor 15:31. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. λαλεῖν 2 Cor 2:17; 12:19. ἀλήθειαν λέγειν Ro 9:1. λέγειν καὶ μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. But also apart fr. such verbs, in numerous pass. it is used w. verbs and nouns of the most varied sort, often without special emphasis, to indicate the scope within which someth. takes place or has taken place, or to designate someth. as being in close assoc. w. Christ, and can be rendered, variously, in connection with, in intimate association with, keeping in mind ἁγιάζεσθαι 1 Cor 1:2, or ἅγιος ἐν Χ. Phil 1:1; ἀσπάζεσθαί τινα 1 Cor 16:19. δικαιοῦσθαι Gal 2:17. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12. παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 4:1. προσδέχεσθαί τινα Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. χαίρειν 3:1; 4:4, 10. γαμηθῆναι ἐν κυρίῳ marry in the Lord=marry a Christian 1 Cor 7:39. προϊστάμενοι ὑμῶν ἐν κυρίῳ your Christian leaders (in the church) 1 Th 5:12 (but s. προί̈στημι 1 and 2).—εὐάρεστος Col 3:20. νήπιος 1 Cor 3:1. φρόνιμος 4:10. παιδαγωγοί vs. 15. ὁδοί vs. 17. Hence used in periphrasis for ‘Christian’ οἱ ὄντες ἐν κυρίῳ Ro 16:11; ἄνθρωπος ἐν Χ. 2 Cor 12:2; αἱ ἐκκλησίαι αἱ ἐν Χ. Gal 1:22; 1 Th 2:14; νεκροὶ ἐν Χ. 4:16; ἐκλεκτός Ro 16:13. δόκιμος vs. 10. δέσμιος Eph 4:1. πιστὸς διάκονος 6:21; ἐν Χ. γεννᾶν τινα become someone’s parent in the Christian life 1 Cor 4:15. τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κυρίῳ 9:1.—The use of ἐν πνεύματι as a formulaic expression is sim.: ἐν πν. εἶναι be under the impulsion of the spirit, i.e. the new self, as opposed to ἐν σαρκί under the domination of the old self Ro 8:9; cp. ἐν νόμῳ 2:12. λαλεῖν speak under divine inspiration 1 Cor 12:3. ἐγενόμην ἐν πνεύματι I was in a state of inspiration Rv 1:10; 4:2; opp. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος came to himself Ac 12:11 (cp. X., An. 1, 5, 17 et al.).—The expr. ἐν πν. εἶναι is also used to express the idea that someone is under the special infl. of a good or even an undesirable spirit: Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; Lk 2:27; 1 Cor 12:3; Rv 17:3; 21:10. ἄνθρωπος ἐν πν. ἀκαθάρτῳ (ὤν) Mk 1:23 (s. GBjörck, ConNeot 7, ’42, 1–3).—ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖσθαι be in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19. οἱ ἐν νόμῳ those who are subject to the law Ro 3:19. ἐν τῷ Ἀδὰμ ἀποθνῄσκειν die because of a connection w. Adam 1 Cor 15:22.—On the formula ἐν ὀνόματι (Χριστοῦ) s. ὄνομα 1, esp. dγג. The OT is the source of the expr. ὀμνύναι ἔν τινι swear by someone or someth. (oft. LXX) Mt 5:34ff; 23:16, 18ff; Rv 10:6; παραγγέλλομέν σοι ἐν Ἰησοῦ Ac 19:14 v.l. The usage in ὁμολογεῖν ἔν τινι acknowledge someone Mt 10:32; Lk 12:8 (s. ὁμολογέω 4b) is Aramaic.

⑤ marker introducing means or instrument, with, a construction that begins w. Homer (many examples of instrumental ἐν in Radermacher’s edition of Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. p. 100; Reader, Polemo p. 258) but whose wide currency in our lit. is partly caused by the infl. of the LXX, and its similarity to the Hebr. constr. w. בְּ (B-D-F §219; Mlt. 104; Mlt-H. 463f; s. esp. M-M p. 210).

ⓐ it can serve to introduce persons or things that accompany someone to secure an objective: ‘along with’

α. pers., esp. of a military force, w. blending of associative (s. 4) and instrumental idea (1 Macc 1:17; 7:14, 28 al.): ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντῆσαι meet, w. 10,000 men Lk 14:31 (cp. 1 Macc 4:6, 29 συνήντησεν αὐτοῖς Ἰούδας ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ἀνδρῶν). ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσιν αὐτοῦ Jd 14 (cp. Jdth 16:3 ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσι δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ).

β. impers. (oft. LXX; PTebt 41, 5 [c. 119 B.C.]; 16, 14 [114 B.C.]; 45, 17 al., where people rush into the village or the house ἐν μαχαίρῃ, ἐν ὅπλοις). (Just., D. 86, 6 τῆς ἀξίνης, ἐν ἧ πεπορευμένοι ἦσαν … κόψαι ξύλα) ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔρχεσθαι come with a stick (as a means of discipline) 1 Cor 4:21 (cp. Lucian, Dial. Mort. 23, 3 Ἑρμῆν καθικόμενον ἐν τῇ ῥάβδῳ; Gen 32:11; 1 Km 17:43; 1 Ch 11:23; Dssm., B 115f [BS 120]). ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας with the full blessing Ro 15:29. ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ Mt 16:28. ἐν αἵματι Hb 9:25 (cp. Mi 6:6). ἐν τῷ ὕδατι καὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι 1J 5:6. ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει τοῦ Ἠλίου equipped w. the spirit and power of Elijah Lk 1:17. φθάνειν ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ come with the preaching of the gospel 2 Cor 10:14. μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ not burdened w. old leaven 1 Cor 5:8.

ⓑ it can serve to express means or instrumentality in terms of location for a specific action (cp. TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 5f [Stone p. 30] κρατῶν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ ζυγόν; Tat. 9, 2 οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεσσοῖς ἀθύροντες ‘those who play w. gaming pieces’ [as, e.g., in backgammon]): κατακαίειν ἐν πυρί Rv 17:16 (cp. Bar 1:2; 1 Esdr 1:52; 1 Macc 5:5 al.; as early as Il. 24, 38; cp. POxy 2747, 74; Aelian, HA 14, 15. Further, the ἐν Rv 17:16 is not textually certain). ἐν ἅλατι ἁλίζειν, ἀρτύειν Mt 5:13; Mk 9:50; Lk 14:34 (s. M-M p. 210; WHutton, ET 58, ’46/47, 166–68). ἐν τῷ αἵματι λευκαίνειν Rv 7:14. ἐν αἵματι καθαρίζειν Hb 9:22. ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ ἀποκτείνειν kill with the sword Rv 6:8 (1 Esdr 1:50; 1 Macc 2:9; cp. 3:3; Jdth 16:4; ἀπολεῖ ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ En 99:16; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010] ἐν ῥ. πεσῇ … πεσοῦνται ἐν μαχαίρῃ; cp. Lucian, Hist. Conscrib. 12 ἐν ἀκοντίῳ φονεύειν). ἐν μαχαίρῃ πατάσσειν Lk 22:49 (διχοτομήσατε … ἐν μ. GrBar 16:3); ἐν μ. ἀπόλλυσθαι perish by the sword Mt 26:52. ποιμαίνειν ἐν ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ Rv 2:27; 12:5; 19:15 (s. ποιμαίνω 2aγ and cp. PGM 36, 109). καταπατεῖν τι ἐν τοῖς ποσίν tread someth. w. the feet Mt 7:6 (cp. Sir 38:29). δύο λαοὺς βλέπω ἐν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς μου I see two peoples with my eyes GJs 17:2 (ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὀρᾶν=see with the eyes: cp. Il. 1, 587; Od. 8, 459; Callinus [VII B.C.], Fgm. 1, 20 Diehl²). ποιεῖν κράτος ἐν βραχίονι do a mighty deed w. one’s arm Lk 1:51 (cp. Sir 38:30); cp. 11:20. δικαιοῦσθαι ἐν τῷ αἵματι be justified by the blood Ro 5:9. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2; ἐν τ. παρακλήσει 2 Cor 7:7. εὐλογεῖν ἐν εὐλογίᾳ Eph 1:3. λαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψάλμοις 5:19. ἀσπάσασθαι … ἐν εὐχῇ greet w. prayer GJs 24:1. Of intellectual process γινώσκειν ἔν τινι know or recognize by someth. (cp. Thuc. 7, 11, 1 ἐν ἐπιστολαῖς ἴστε; Sir 4:24; 11:28; 26:29) J 13:35; 1J 3:19; cp. ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου in the breaking of bread Lk 24:35 (s. 10c).—The ἐν which takes the place of the gen. of price is also instrumental ἠγόρασας ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου Rv 5:9 (cp. 1 Ch 21:24 ἀγοράζω ἐν ἀργυρίῳ).—ἐν ᾧ whereby Ro 14:21.—The idiom ἀλλάσσειν, μεταλλάσσειν τι ἔν τινι exchange someth. for someth. else Ro 1:23, 25 (cp. Ps 105:20) is not un-Greek (Soph., Ant. 945 Danaë had to οὐράνιον φῶς ἀλλάξαι ἐν χαλκοδέτοις αὐλαῖς=change the heavenly light for brass-bound chambers).

⑥ marker of agency: with the help of (Diod S 19, 46, 4 ἐν τοῖς μετέχουσι τοῦ συνεδρίου=with the help of the members of the council; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 7, 9 p. 259, 31 ἐν ἐκείνῳ ἑαλωκότες) ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια Mt 9:34. ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις λαλεῖν 1 Cor 14:21. κρίνειν τ. οἰκουμένην ἐν ἀνδρί Ac 17:31 (cp. SIG² 850, 8 [173/172 B.C.] κριθέντω ἐν ἄνδροις τρίοις; Synes., Ep. 91 p. 231b ἐν ἀνδρί); perh. 1 Cor 6:2 (s. 1e); ἀπολύτρωσις ἐν Χρ. redemption through Christ Ro 3:24 (cp. ἐν αὐτῷ σωθήσεσθε Just., A I, 60, 3).

⑦ marker of circumstance or condition under which someth. takes place: ἐν ᾧ κρίνεις Ro 2:1 (but s. B-D-F §219, 2); ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει 14:22; ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται 2 Cor 11:12; ἐν ᾧ τις τολμᾷ 11:21; ἐν ᾧ καταλαλοῦσιν whereas they slander 1 Pt 2:12, cp. 3:16 (on these Petrine pass. s. also ὅς 1k); ἐν ᾧ ξενίζονται in view of your changed attitude they consider it odd 4:4. ἐν ᾧ in 3:19 may similarly refer to a changed circumstance, i.e. from death to life (WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits, ’65, esp. 135–42: ‘in this sphere, under this influence’ [of the spirit]). Other possibilities: as far as this is concerned: πνεῦμα• ἐν ᾧ spirit; as which (FZimmermann, APF 11, ’35, 174 ‘meanwhile’ [indessen]; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism, ’46, 108–15: ‘on that occasion’=when he died).—Before a substantive inf. (oft. LXX; s. KHuber, Unters. über den Sprachchar. des griech. Lev., diss. Zürich 1916, 83): in that w. pres. inf. (POxy 743, 35 [2 B.C.] ἐν τῷ δέ με περισπᾶσθαι οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην συντυχεῖν Ἀπολλωνίῳ; Just., D. 10, 3 ἐν τῷ μήτε σάββατα τηρεῖν μήτε …) βασανιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν as they were having rough going in the waves=having a difficult time making headway Mk 6:48. ἐθαύμαζον ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν … αὐτόν they marveled over his delay Lk 1:21. ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἐκτείνειν σε in that you extend your hand Ac 4:30; cp. 3:26; Hb 8:13. W. aor. inf. ἐν τῷ ὑποτάξαι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα Hb 2:8. Somet. the circumstantial and temporal (s. 7 and 10) uses are so intermingled that it is difficult to decide between them; so in some of the pass. cited above, and also Hv 1, 1, 8 et al. (B-D-F §404, 3; Rob. 1073).—WHutton, Considerations for the Translation of ἐν, Bible Translator 9, ’58, 163–70; response by NTurner, ibid. 10, ’59, 113–20.—On ἐν w. article and inf. s. ISoisalon-Soininen, Die Infinitive in der LXX, ’65, 80ff.

⑧ marker denoting the object to which someth. happens or in which someth. shows itself, or by which someth. is recognized, to, by, in connection with: ζητεῖν τι ἔν τινι require someth. in the case of someone 1 Cor 4:2; cp. ἐν ἡμῖν μάθητε so that you might learn in connection w. us vs. 6. Cp. Phil 1:30. ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί that this may be done in my case 1 Cor 9:15 (Just., D. 77, 3 τοῦτο γενόμενον ἐν τῷ ἡμετέρῳ Χριστῷ). ἐδόξαζον ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸν θεόν perh. they glorified God in my case Gal 1:24, though because of me and for me are also possible. μήτι ἐν ἐμοὶ ἀνεκεφαλαιώθη ἡ ἱστορία GJs 13:1 (s. ἀνακεφαλαιόω 1). ποιεῖν τι ἔν τινι do someth. to (with) someone (Epict., Ench. 33, 12; Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 18 μὴ ἑτεροῖόν τι ποιήσῃς ἐν ἐμοί; Gen 40:14; Jdth 7:24; 1 Macc 7:23) Mt 17:12; Lk 23:31. ἐργάζεσθαί τι ἔν τινι Mk 14:6. ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι have someth. in someone J 3:15 (but ἐν αὐτῷ is oft. constr. w. πιστεύων, cp. v.l.); cp. 14:30 (s. BNoack, Satanas u. Soteria ’48, 92). ἵνα δικαιοσύνης ναὸν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ σώματι ἀναδείξῃ AcPlCor 2:17 (s. ἀναδείκνυμι 1).—For the ordinary dat. (Diod S 3, 51, 4 ἐν ἀψύχῳ ἀδύνατον=it is impossible for a lifeless thing; Ael. Aristid. 49, 15 K.=25 p. 492 D.: ἐν Νηρίτῳ θαυμαστὰ ἐνεδείξατο=[God] showed wonderful things to N.; 53 p. 629 D.: οὐ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς βελτίστοις εἰσὶ παῖδες, ἐν δὲ πονηροτάτοις οὐκέτι=it is not the case that the very good have children, and the very bad have none [datives of possession]; 54 p. 653 D.: ἐν τ. φαύλοις θετέον=to the bad; EpJer 66 ἐν ἔθνεσιν; Aesop, Fab. 19, 8 and 348a, 5 v.l. Ch.) ἀποκαλύψαι τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοί Gal 1:16. φανερόν ἐστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς Ro 1:19 (Aesop 15c, 11 Ch. τ. φανερὸν ἐν πᾶσιν=evident to all). ἐν ἐμοὶ βάρβαρος (corresp. to τῷ λαλοῦντι βάρβ.) 1 Cor 14:11 (Amphis Com. [IV B.C.] 21 μάταιός ἐστιν ἐν ἐμοί). δεδομένον ἐν ἀνθρώποις Ac 4:12. θεῷ … ἐν ἀνθρώποις Lk 2:14.—Esp. w. verbs of striking against: προσκόπτω, πταίω, σκανδαλίζομαι; s. these entries.

⑨ marker of cause or reason, because of, on account of (PParis 28, 13=UPZ 48, 12f [162/161 B.C.] διαλυόμενοι ἐν τῷ λιμῷ; Ps 30:11; 1 Macc 16:3 ἐν τῷ ἐλέει; 2 Macc 7:29; Sir 33:17)

ⓐ gener. ἁγιάζεσθαι ἔν τινι Hb 10:10; 1 Cor 7:14. ἐν τ. ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν Ro 1:24; perh. ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα 9:7; Hb 11:18 (both Gen 21:12). ἐν τῇ πολυλογίᾳ αὐτῶν because of their many words Mt 6:7. ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν this is the reason why we believe J 16:30; cp. Ac 24:16; 1 Cor 4:4 (Just., D. 68, 7 οὐχὶ καὶ ἐν τούτῳ δυσωπήσω ὑμᾶς μὴ πείθεσθαι τοῖς διδασκάλοις ὑμῶν=‘surely you will be convinced by this [argument] to lose confidence in your teachers, won’t you?’); perh. 2 Cor 5:2. Sim., of the occasion: ἔφυγεν ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ at this statement Ac 7:29; cp. 8:6. W. attraction ἐν ᾧ = ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that = because Ro 8:3; Hb 2:18; 6:17.

ⓑ w. verbs that express feeling or emotion, to denote that toward which the feeling is directed; so: εὐδοκεῖν (εὐδοκία), εὐφραίνεσθαι, καυχᾶσθαι, χαίρειν et al.

⑩ marker of a period of time, in, while, when

ⓐ indicating an occurrence or action within which, at a certain point, someth. occurs Mt 2:1. ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 3:1. ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς afterward Lk 7:11. ἐν τῷ μεταξύ meanwhile (PTebt 72, 190; PFlor 36, 5) J 4:31. in the course of, within ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις (X., Ages. 1, 34; Diod S 13, 14, 2; 20, 83, 4; Arrian, Anab. 4, 6, 4 ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις; Aelian, VH 1, 6; IPriene 9, 29; GDI 1222, 4 [Arcadia] ἰν ἁμέραις τρισί; EpArist 24; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1:3 Jac.) Mt 27:40; J 2:19f.

ⓑ point of time when someth. occurs ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως Mt 11:22 (En 10:6; Just., D. 38, 2; Tat. 12, 4). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ J 6:44; 11:24; 12:48; cp. 7:37. ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ Mt 8:13; 10:19; cp. 7:22; J 4:53. ἐν σαββάτῳ 12:2; J 7:23. ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ J 11:9 (opp. ἐν τῇ νυκτί vs. 10). ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ on the second visit Ac 7:13. ἐν τῇ παλιγγενεσίᾳ in the new age Mt 19:28. ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ 1 Cor 15:23; 1 Th 2:19; 3:13; Phil 2:12 (here, in contrast to the other pass., there is no reference to the second coming of Christ.—Just., D. 31, 1 ἐν τῇ ἐνδόξῳ γινομένῃ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ; 35, 8; 54, 1 al.); 1J 2:28. ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει in the resurrection Mt 22:28; Mk 12:23; Lk 14:14; 20:33; J 11:24 (Just., D. 45, 2 ἐν τῇ τῶν νεκρῶν ἀναστάσει). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι at the last trumpet-call 1 Cor 15:52. ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει at the appearance of Jesus/Christ (in the last days) 2 Th 1:7; 1 Pt 1:7, 13; 4:13.

ⓒ to introduce an activity whose time is given when, while, during (Diod S 23, 12, 1 ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις=in the case of this kind of behavior) ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ when (you) pray Mt 21:22. ἐν τῇ στάσει during the revolt Mk 15:7. ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ in the course of his teaching Mk 4:2; 12:38. If Lk 24:35 belongs here, the sense would be on the occasion of, when (but s. 5b). ἐν αὐτῷ in it (the preaching of the gospel) Eph 6:20. γρηγοροῦντες ἐν αὐτῇ (τῇ προσευχῇ) while you are watchful in it Col 4:2. Esp. w. the pres. inf. used substantively: ἐν τῷ σπείρειν while (he) sowed Mt 13:4; Mk 4:4; cp. 6:48 (s. 7 above and βασανίζω); ἐν τῷ καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους while people were asleep Mt 13:25; ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσθαι αὐτόν during the accusations against him 27:12. W. the aor. inf. the meaning is likewise when. Owing to the fundamental significance of the aor. the action is the focal point (s. Rob. 1073, opp. B-D-F §404) ἐν τῷ γενέσθαι τὴν φωνήν Lk 9:36. ἐν τῷ ἐπανελθεῖν αὐτόν 19:15. ἐν τῷ εἰσελθεῖν αὐτούς 9:34.—W. ἐν ᾦ while, as long as (Soph., Trach. 929; Cleanthes [IV/III B.C.] Stoic. I p. 135, 1 [Diog. L. 7, 171]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 11 Jac.; Plut., Mor. 356c; Arrian, Anab. 6, 12, 1; Pamprepios of Panopolis [V A.D.] 1, 22 [ed. HGerstinger, SBWienAk 208/3, 1928]) Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34; 24:44 D; J 5:7.

⑪ marker denoting kind and manner, esp. functioning as an auxiliary in periphrasis for adverbs (Kühner-G. I 466): ἐν δυνάμει w. power, powerfully Mk 9:1; Ro 1:4; Col 1:29; 2 Th 1:11; ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ justly Ac 17:31; Rv 19:11 (cp. Just., A II, 4, 3 and D. 16, 3; 19, 2 ἐν δίκῃ). ἐν χαρᾷ joyfully Ro 15:32. ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ earnestly Ac 26:7. ἐν σπουδῇ zealously Ro 12:8. ἐν χάριτι graciously Gal 1:6; 2 Th 2:16. ἐν (πάσῃ) παρρησίᾳ freely, openly J 7:4; 16:29; Phil 1:20. ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ Ac 5:23. ἐν τάχει (PHib 47, 35 [256 B.C.] ἀπόστειλον ἐν τάχει) Lk 18:8; Ro 16:20; Rv 1:1; 22:6. ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7 (belongs prob. not to σοφία, but to λαλοῦμεν: in the form of a secret; cp. Polyb. 23, 3, 4; 26, 7, 5; Just., D. 63, 2 Μωυσῆς … ἐν παραβολῇ λέγων; 68, 6 εἰρήμενον … ἐν μυστηρίῳ; Diod S 17, 8, 5 ἐν δωρεαῖς λαβόντες=as gifts; 2 Macc 4:30 ἐν δωρεᾷ=as a gift; Sir 26:3; Polyb. 28, 17, 9 λαμβάνειν τι ἐν φερνῇ). Of the norm: ἐν μέτρῳ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου μέρους acc. to the measure of each individual part Eph 4:16. On 1 Cor 1:21 s. AWedderburn, ZNW 64, ’73, 132–34.

⑫ marker of specification or substance: w. adj. πλούσιος ἐν ἐλέει Eph 2:4; cp. Tit 2:3; Js 1:8.—of substance consisting in (BGU 72, 11 [191 A.D.] ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε) τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν Eph 2:15. ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι Js 1:4 (contrast Just., A I, 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι). Hb 13:21a.— amounting to (BGU 970, 14=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 242, 14f [177 A.D.] προσηνενκάμην αὐτῷ προοῖκα ἐν δραχμαῖς ἐννακοσίαις) πᾶσαν τὴν συγγένειαν ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε Ac 7:14.—Very rarely for the genitive (Philo Mech. 75, 29 τὸ ἐν τῷ κυλίνδρῳ κοίλασμα; EpArist 31 ἡ ἐν αὐτοῖς θεωρία = ἡ αὐτῶν θ.; cp. 29; Tat. 18, 1 πᾶν τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ εἶδος) ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι the free gift in beneficence or grace Ro 5:15.—DELG. LfgrE s.v. ἐν col. 569 (lit. esp. early Greek). M-M. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐν
20 λαός

λαός

Grammatical information: m.

Meaning: `(the common) folk, crowd, military, people', in the NT esp. `the Jewish people', pl. `the military, men, subjects, serfs', also `the laity' (LXX); in sing. `follower' (Hecat. 23J.); on use and spread amply Björck Alpha impurum 318ff. (Il., Dor., hell).

Other forms: Ion. ληός (rare), Ion. Att. λεώς (archaic a. rare)

Dialectal forms: Myc. rawaketa \/lāwāgetās\/ cf. Chantraine Études 88m. n. 1

Compounds: Many old compp.: ΛαϜο-πτόλεμος, Ϝιό-λαϜος (Cor.), λαγέτας m. `leader of the people' (Pi.) from λᾱϜ-ᾱγετᾱς, Λα-έρ-της s.v., λαο-σσόος `urging the men' (Hom.; s. σεύω), λαο-, λεω-φόρος `carrying the people, publicly', of streets, as subst. `road' (Il.), Μενέλαος (Il.), - λεως Att. (Björck 104 ff.), a.o.; on the compounds Fick-Bechtel PN 184ff., and Björck l.c.

Derivatives: Few derivv. (partly because of the synonymous δῆμος, partly because of the homonymous forms of λᾱ̃ας): 1. λαϊκός `of the people, common' (hell.). 2. λαώδης `popular' (Ph., Plu.). 3. Λήϊτος PN (Il.), λήϊτον n. (on the very rare suffix - ιτο- Schwyzer 504) `townhall' with the Achaeans (Hdt., Plu. with Ion.- Att. form for) λάϊτον τὸ ἀρχεῖον, λαΐτων τῶν δημοσίων τόπων H.; beside it a.o λῃ̃τον (cod. λῃτόν) δημόσιον, ληΐτη, οἱ δε λῄτη (cod. λῃτή) ἱέρεια; cf. λαιετόν `townhall' (Su.) [strange]. λειτόν βλάσφημον H. (correct?); Fur. 238 n. 45 objects that - ιτο- is a Pre-Greek suffix, ib. 163, 187. Deriv. ληιτιαί ἡγεμονίαι, στρατιαί H. (Scheller Oxytonierung 91).

Origin: IE [Indo-European] [00] *leh₂-u̯o- `(fighting) people'

Etymology: As adj. 1.member in λῃτουργέω ( λειτ-) `fulfill a public office on private means, provide a (public, ecclesiastical) service' with λῃτουργ-ία ( λειτ-) `state-, service, Liturgie' (Att.), - ός, - ημα etc. (hell.), comp. *ληϊτο-Ϝεργ-έω to *λήϊτα ἔργα, cf. δημιουργέω, - ός (s.v.); also λῄτ-αρχος m. `public priest' (Lyc. 991). - Cf. also λείτωρ. Like thr Germ. word for `people', OHG liut, OE lēod, λᾱ(Ϝ)ός was origin. an (abstracte) collective; to it came the plur. λᾱ(Ϝ)οί as liuti, lēode ' Leute', to which again the sing. ληός `follower' as liut `man', cf. Schwyzer-Debrunner 42 n. 3, Wackernagel Synt. 1,92 f. - Otherwise than with the synonymous δῆμος and στρατός, λᾱ(Ϝ)ός, which was in Ion.-Att. never quite a thome, has no IE. etymologie, but was nevertheless old. (Not to λᾶας.) Mostly connected with Hitt. lah̯h̯a- `campaign' (Sturtevanr Lang. 7 (1931) 120; Tischler, Heth. etym. Glossar 5, 8). - In Maced.-Epir. PN Δρεβελαου v. Blumenthal IF 49, 181ff. finds an Illyr. pendant of Gr. Τρεφέλεως (further a PN Lava).

Page in Frisk: 2,83-84

Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > λαός

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

A Common Word Between Us and You — is an open letter, dated 13 October 2007, from leaders of the Muslim faith to leaders of the Christian faith. It calls for peace between Muslims and Christians and tries to work for common ground and understanding among both faiths, in line with… … Wikipedia
Word Association — is a common word game involving an exchange of words that are associated together.How to playOnce an original word has been chosen, usually randomly or arbitrarily, a player will find a word that they associate with it and make it known to all… … Wikipedia
Word (computing) — In computing, word is a term for the natural unit of data used by a particular computer design. A word is simply a fixed sized group of bits that are handled together by the machine. The number of bits in a word (the word size or word length) is… … Wikipedia
use — verb To make use of; to convert to one s service; to employ; to avail oneself of; to utilize; to carry out a purpose or action by means of; to put into action or service, especially to attain an end. State v. Howard, 221 Kan. 51, 557 P.2d 1280,… … Black's law dictionary
use — v. /yoohz/ or, for pt. form of 9, /yoohst/; n. /yoohs/, v., used, using, n. v.t. 1. to employ for some purpose; put into service; make use of: to use a knife. 2. to avail oneself of; apply to one s own purposes: to use the facilities. 3. to… … Universalium
Word Racer — is a game developed by Yahoo! in 1999 for use on its Yahoo! Games page. The game play is similar to Boggle with some notable exceptions, especially the scoring and game board configurations. Rules and Scoring There are four rounds per game of… … Wikipedia
Word salad (computer science) — Word salad is a mixture of seemingly meaningful words that together signify nothing; [Lavergne 2006:384] the phrase draws its name from the common name for a symptom of schizophrenia, Word salad. When applied to a physical theory, word salad is a … Wikipedia
Common Eland — Conservation status Least Concern (IUCN 3 … Wikipedia
Common Soapwort — Scientific classification Kingdom: Plantae (unranked) … Wikipedia
common — adj 1 *universal, general, generic Analogous words: shared, partaken, participated (see SHARE vb): joined or joint, united, conjoined, connected, associated (see corresponding verbs at JOIN): merged, blended, amalgamated (see MIX) Antonyms:… … New Dictionary of Synonyms
Word error rate — (WER) is a common metric of the performance of a speech recognition system.The general difficulty of measuring performance lies in the fact that the recognized word sequence can have a different length from the reference word sequence (supposedly … Wikipedia

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на все языки

use of a common word

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на все языки

use of a common word

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: